diff options
| author | Papoteur <papoteur@mageia.org> | 2023-06-11 13:45:27 +0200 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Papoteur <papoteur@mageia.org> | 2023-06-11 13:45:27 +0200 |
| commit | bdde28384c351129b0ae84ffc50115a5b2975c78 (patch) | |
| tree | f0a163bf98c0fb1b7ad640802d8f3c3d4cfecbfd | |
| parent | dd6250362f8d57ce24557915e8df80a073a6ebeb (diff) | |
| download | drakx-installer-help-bdde28384c351129b0ae84ffc50115a5b2975c78.tar drakx-installer-help-bdde28384c351129b0ae84ffc50115a5b2975c78.tar.gz drakx-installer-help-bdde28384c351129b0ae84ffc50115a5b2975c78.tar.bz2 drakx-installer-help-bdde28384c351129b0ae84ffc50115a5b2975c78.tar.xz drakx-installer-help-bdde28384c351129b0ae84ffc50115a5b2975c78.zip | |
Update for Mageia 9
114 files changed, 2234 insertions, 1525 deletions
diff --git a/cs/Select-and-use-ISOs.html b/cs/Select-and-use-ISOs.html index 57d1bfb..3323164 100644 --- a/cs/Select-and-use-ISOs.html +++ b/cs/Select-and-use-ISOs.html @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ </ul> </div> - <p>More details are given in the next sections.</p> + <p>Více informací naleznete v následující sekci.</p> </div> @@ -257,12 +257,12 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>The Live media also includes an Installer.</p> + <p>Živá média také obsahují instalátor.</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Each ISO contains only one desktop environment (Plasma, GNOME or Xfce)</p> + <p>Každé ISO obsahuje pouze jedno grafické prostředí (Plasma, GNOME nebo Xfce)</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>They contain non-free software</p> + <p>Obsahují nesvobodný software</p> </li> </ul> @@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Plasma desktop environment only</p> + <p>Pouze pracovní prostředí Plasma</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>GNOME desktop environment only</p> + <p>Pouze pracovní prostředí GNOME</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Xfce desktop environment only</p> + <p>Pouze pracovní prostředí Xfce</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -770,7 +770,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Enter the command <span class="command"><strong>fdisk -l</strong></span></p> + <p>Napište příkaz <span class="command"><strong>fdisk -l</strong></span></p> </li> @@ -813,7 +813,7 @@ <p>Where <em class="replaceable"><code>X</code></em>=your device name eg: <code class="filename">/dev/sdd</code></p> - <p>Example:<code class="literal"> dd if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-6-x86_64-DVD.iso + <p>Příklad:<code class="literal"> dd if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-6-x86_64-DVD.iso of=/dev/sdd bs=1M</code></p> <div class="tip" title="Tip" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> @@ -838,7 +838,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Enter the command: <span class="command"><strong>sync</strong></span></p> + <p>Napište příkaz: <span class="command"><strong>sync</strong></span></p> </li> <li class="listitem"> diff --git a/cs/acceptLicense.html b/cs/acceptLicense.html index a299324..97ce3e3 100644 --- a/cs/acceptLicense.html +++ b/cs/acceptLicense.html @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Před instalací <span class="application">Mageii</span>, si pečlivě přečtěte + <p>Před instalací <span class="application">Mageie</span> si pečlivě přečtěte licenční podmínky a ustanovení. </p> @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ - <p>Důležité informace o tomto vydání Mageia můžete zobrazit kliknutím na + <p>Důležité informace o tomto vydání Mageie můžete zobrazit kliknutím na tlačítko <span class="emphasis"><em>Poznámky k vydání</em></span>. </p> diff --git a/cs/addUser.html b/cs/addUser.html index cb5349c..0367f6c 100644 --- a/cs/addUser.html +++ b/cs/addUser.html @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ <p><span class="bold"><strong>Ikona</strong></span></p> - <p>Klikněte na toto tlačítko, pokud chcete změnit ikonu uživatele</p> + <p>Pokud chcete změnit ikonu uživatele, klepněte na toto tlačítko</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -142,8 +142,8 @@ <p>Zadejte uživatelské heslo (pamatujte na doporučení z poznámky výše).</p> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Password (again):</strong></span> Retype the user - password. DrakX will check that you have not mistyped the password. + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Heslo (znovu):</strong></span> Znovu zadejte uživatelské + heslo. DrakX zkontroluje, zda jste heslo zadali správně. </p> </li> @@ -160,14 +160,14 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p>Any users added while installing Mageia, will have a home directory that is - both read and write protected (umask=0027) + <p>Jakýkoliv uživatel přidaný v průběhu instalace Mageie bude mít domovský + adresář chráněn proti čtení a zápisu (umask=0027) </p> - <p>You can add any extra needed users in the <span class="emphasis"><em>Configuration - - Summary</em></span> step during the install. Choose <span class="emphasis"><em>User - management</em></span>. + <p>Během instalace můžete přidat další potřebné uživatele v kroku + <span class="emphasis"><em>Nastavení - Souhrn</em></span>, zvolením <span class="emphasis"><em>Správa + uživatelů</em></span>. </p> @@ -181,11 +181,11 @@ </div> - <div class="section" title="User Management (advanced)"> + <div class="section" title="Správa uživatelů (pokročilé)"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="addUserAdvanced"></a>User Management (advanced) + <h3 class="title"><a name="addUserAdvanced"></a>Správa uživatelů (pokročilé) </h3> </div> </div> @@ -193,8 +193,8 @@ - <p>The <span class="emphasis"><em>Advanced</em></span> option allows you to edit further settings - for the user you are adding. + <p> <span class="emphasis"><em>Pokročílé</em></span> možnosti umožňují upravit rozšířené + nastavení pro uživatele, kterého přidáváte. </p> @@ -209,16 +209,16 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>User ID</em></span>: Here you can set the user ID for any user you - added in the previous screen. If you are unsure what the purpose of this is, - then leave it blank. + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>ID uživatele</em></span>: Zde můžete nastavit ID pro uživatele, + které jste přidali na předchozí obrazovce. Pokud si nejste jisti k čemu je + toto dobré, nevyplňujte. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Group ID</em></span>: This lets you set the group ID. Again, if - unsure, leave it blank. + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>ID skupiny</em></span>: Zde můžete nastavit ID skupiny. Znovu, + pokud si nejste jisti, nechte prázdné. </p> </li> diff --git a/cs/diskPartitioning.html b/cs/diskPartitioning.html index 1e9c065..d94b015 100644 --- a/cs/diskPartitioning.html +++ b/cs/diskPartitioning.html @@ -28,11 +28,11 @@ - <div lang="cs" class="section" title="Suggested Partitioning"> + <div lang="cs" class="section" title="Navrhované rozdělení disku"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="doPartitionDisks"></a>Suggested Partitioning + <h3 class="title"><a name="doPartitionDisks"></a>Navrhované rozdělení disku </h3> </div> </div> @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa4"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Use Existing Partitions</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa4"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Použít existující oddíly</strong></span></p> <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa5"></a>Pokud je dostupná tato volba, potom byly nalezeny stávající s Linuxem @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa6"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Use Free Space</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa6"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Použít volné místo</strong></span></p> <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa7"></a>Pokud máte nevyužité místo na vašem pevném disku, potom ho tato volba @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa8"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Use Free Space on a Windows Partition</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa8"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Použít volné místo na oddílu s Windows</strong></span></p> <p><a name="suggestedPartitioning-pa9"></a>If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa12"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Smazat a použít celý disk</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa13"></a>This option will allocate the entire drive for Mageia + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa13"></a>Toto nastavení přidělí Mageii celý disk </p> @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa16"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Custom Disk Partitioning</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa16"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Vlastní rozdělení disku</strong></span></p> <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa17"></a>Toto vám dává úplnou kontrolu nad umístěním instalace na vašem pevném disku @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ </p> - <p>See <a class="xref" href="diskPartitioning.html#diskdrake" title="Custom Disk Partitioning with DiskDrake">DiskDrake</a> for information on how to proceed. + <p>See <a class="xref" href="diskPartitioning.html#diskdrake" title="Vlastní rozdělení disku s DiskDrake">DiskDrake</a> for information on how to proceed. </p> </td> @@ -429,8 +429,8 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>For any partitions that you don't need to make use of, you can leave the - mount point field blank. + <p>Pro oddíly, které nechcete používat, můžete pole přípojného bodu ponechat + prázdné. </p> </li> @@ -447,8 +447,8 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p>If you make any changes here, ensure you still have a <code class="filename">/</code> - (root) partition. + <p>Pokud zde provedete nějaké změny, ujistěte se, že stále máte diskový oddíl + <code class="filename">/</code> (root). </p> </td> @@ -534,11 +534,11 @@ </div> - <div lang="cs" class="section" title="Custom Disk Partitioning with DiskDrake"> + <div lang="cs" class="section" title="Vlastní rozdělení disku s DiskDrake"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="diskdrake"></a>Custom Disk Partitioning with DiskDrake + <h3 class="title"><a name="diskdrake"></a>Vlastní rozdělení disku s DiskDrake </h3> </div> </div> diff --git a/cs/firewall.html b/cs/firewall.html index 4376e21..724725b 100644 --- a/cs/firewall.html +++ b/cs/firewall.html @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ </p> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em><port-number>/<protocol></em></span></p> + <p><span class="emphasis"><em><číslo-portu>/<protokol></em></span></p> <table border="0" summary="Simple list" class="simplelist"> diff --git a/cs/graphicalConfiguration.html b/cs/graphicalConfiguration.html index b2b7d92..a7fa648 100644 --- a/cs/graphicalConfiguration.html +++ b/cs/graphicalConfiguration.html @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="configureX_chooser-pa2"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Graphics Card</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="configureX_chooser-pa2"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Grafická karta</strong></span></p> <p>If you need to, you can select a specific card from this expandable diff --git a/cs/index.html b/cs/index.html index ac47013..76d71a1 100644 --- a/cs/index.html +++ b/cs/index.html @@ -54,10 +54,10 @@ <dt><span class="section"><a href="diskPartitioning.html">Rozdělení disku</a></span></dt> <dd> <dl> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="diskPartitioning.html#doPartitionDisks">Suggested Partitioning</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="diskPartitioning.html#doPartitionDisks">Navrhované rozdělení disku</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="diskPartitioning.html#ask_mntpoint_s">Zvolte si přípojné body</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="diskPartitioning.html#takeOverHdConfirm">Potvrzení naformátování pevného disku</a></span></dt> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="diskPartitioning.html#diskdrake">Custom Disk Partitioning with DiskDrake</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="diskPartitioning.html#diskdrake">Vlastní rozdělení disku s DiskDrake</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="diskPartitioning.html#formatPartitions">Formátování</a></span></dt> </dl> </dd> @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ <dl> <dt><span class="section"><a href="addUser.html#root-password">Nastavení hesla správce (uživatele root):</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="addUser.html#enterUser">Zadejte uživatele</a></span></dt> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="addUser.html#addUserAdvanced">User Management (advanced)</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="addUser.html#addUserAdvanced">Správa uživatelů (pokročilé)</a></span></dt> </dl> </dd> <dt><span class="section"><a href="graphicalConfiguration.html">Graphical Configuration</a></span></dt> @@ -90,9 +90,9 @@ <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html">Zaváděcí program</a></span></dt> <dd> <dl> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e999">Dostupné Zavaděče</a></span></dt> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e1028">Nastavení Bootloaderu</a></span></dt> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e1152">Další volby</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e999">Dostupné zavaděče</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e1028">Nastavení zavaděče</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e1160">Další volby</a></span></dt> </dl> </dd> <dt><span class="section"><a href="misc-params.html">Souhrn nastavení</a></span></dt> diff --git a/cs/installUpdates.html b/cs/installUpdates.html index 0a2d303..1196bf2 100644 --- a/cs/installUpdates.html +++ b/cs/installUpdates.html @@ -28,6 +28,8 @@ + + diff --git a/cs/installer.html b/cs/installer.html index b7084b3..29449f5 100644 --- a/cs/installer.html +++ b/cs/installer.html @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Install Mageia</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Instalovat Mageiu</strong></span></p> <p>Install Mageia to a hard disk. This is the default option, and will @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Rescue System</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Záchranný systém</strong></span></p> <p>This option allows you to either re-install the bootloader for an existing @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ <p><span class="bold"><strong>F2: Jazyk</strong></span></p> - <p>Press F2 for alternative languages.</p> + <p>Pro další jazyky stiskněte F2</p> </li> </ul> @@ -207,11 +207,11 @@ </div> - <div class="section" title="UEFI Systems"> + <div class="section" title="Systémy UEFI"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e310"></a>UEFI Systems + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e310"></a>Systémy UEFI </h4> </div> </div> diff --git a/cs/misc-params.html b/cs/misc-params.html index ce400b7..0fb588c 100644 --- a/cs/misc-params.html +++ b/cs/misc-params.html @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="misc-params-security-pa1"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Security Level</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-security-pa1"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Úroveň zabezpečení</strong></span></p> <p><a name="misc-params-security-pa1a"></a>The Security level for your computer, in most cases the default setting diff --git a/cs/selectInstallClass.html b/cs/selectInstallClass.html index 4b29c17..8e20abd 100644 --- a/cs/selectInstallClass.html +++ b/cs/selectInstallClass.html @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist" compact> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Install</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Instalovat</strong></span></p> <p>Use this option to perform a fresh installation of Mageia. This will format @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Upgrade</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Povýšení</strong></span></p> <p>Use this option to upgrade an existing installation of Mageia.</p> diff --git a/cs/setupBootloader.html b/cs/setupBootloader.html index 435a408..90be968 100644 --- a/cs/setupBootloader.html +++ b/cs/setupBootloader.html @@ -22,13 +22,24 @@ </div> </div> </div> + + + + + + + - <div class="section" title="Dostupné Zavaděče"> + + + + + <div class="section" title="Dostupné zavaděče"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e999"></a>Dostupné Zavaděče + <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e999"></a>Dostupné zavaděče </h3> </div> </div> @@ -67,7 +78,7 @@ </div> <div class="itemizedlist"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Grub2-efi on UEFI systems</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Grub2-efi na UEFI systémech</strong></span></p> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> @@ -142,11 +153,11 @@ </div> - <div class="section" title="Nastavení Bootloaderu"> + <div class="section" title="Nastavení zavaděče"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e1028"></a>Nastavení Bootloaderu + <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e1028"></a>Nastavení zavaděče </h3> </div> </div> @@ -237,7 +248,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Delay before booting the default image</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Prodleva před spuštěním výchozího obrazu</strong></span></p> <p>This text box lets you set a delay, in seconds, before the default operating system is started up. @@ -246,7 +257,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Security</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Zabezpečení</strong></span></p> <p>This allows you to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username and password will be required when booting in order to select a booting @@ -265,7 +276,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Password (again)</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Heslo (znovu)</strong></span></p> <p>Retype the password and DrakX will check that it matches with the one set above @@ -275,13 +286,13 @@ </ul> </div> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Advanced</em></span></p> + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Rozšířené</em></span></p> <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Enable ACPI</em></span></p> + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Povolit ACPI</em></span></p> <p>ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices. Deselecting it @@ -293,7 +304,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Enable SMP</em></span></p> + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Povolit SMP</em></span></p> <p>This option enables/disables symmetric multiprocessing for multi-core processors @@ -302,7 +313,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Enable APIC</em></span></p> + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Povolit APIC</em></span></p> <p>Enabling this gives the operating system access to the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. APIC devices permit more complex priority models, and @@ -312,7 +323,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Enable Local APIC</em></span></p> + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Povolit lokální APIC</em></span></p> <p>Here you can set Local APIC, which manages all external interrupts for a specific processor in an SMP system @@ -342,23 +353,31 @@ </p> + <p>Your rEFInd configuration options:</p> + <div class="itemizedlist"> - <p>Your rEFInd configuration options:</p> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="guimenuitem">Install or update rEFInd in the EFI system - partition.</span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Install or update rEFInd in the EFI system + partition.</strong></span></p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="guimenuitem">Install in EFI/Boot partition (workaround for some - BIOS's).</span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Install in /EFI/BOOT.</strong></span></p> + + <p>This option installs the bootloader in the /EFI/BOOT directory of the ESP + (EFI System Partition). This can be useful when: + </p> - <p>With some BIOS's, the newly written bootloader for Mageia at end of the - installation will not be recognized. In that case, you can use this option - as a workaround for the issue. + <p>(a) Installing onto a removable drive (e.g. a USB stick) that can be removed + and plugged into a different machine. If the bootloader is stored in + /EFI/BOOT, UEFI BIOS's will detect it and allow you to boot from that drive. + </p> + + <p>(b) As a workaround where, due to a buggy UEFI BIOS, the newly written + bootloader for Mageia will not be recognized at end of the installation. </p> </li> @@ -366,7 +385,7 @@ </div> <p>If you did not select rEFInd as the bootloader to use in the previous - section, then your bootloader configurations are shown below: + section, then your bootloader configuration options are shown below: </p> @@ -374,14 +393,14 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Default</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Výchozí</strong></span></p> - <p>The operating system to be started up by default.</p> + <p>Operační systém, který má startovat jako výchozí.</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Append</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Přidat</strong></span></p> <p>This option lets you pass information to the kernel or tell the kernel to give you more information as it boots. @@ -390,7 +409,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Probe foreign OS</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Zkoušet cizí OS</strong></span></p> <p>If you already have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them to your new Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, @@ -398,17 +417,38 @@ </p> </li> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Install in /EFI/BOOT. </strong></span>(Note: this menu + option only becomes available where the installer detects that a machine is + in UEFI mode). + </p> + + <p>This option installs the bootloader in the /EFI/BOOT directory of the ESP + (EFI System Partition). This can be useful when: + </p> + + <p>(a) Installing onto a removable drive (e.g. a USB stick) that can be removed + and plugged into a different machine. If the bootloader is stored in + /EFI/BOOT, UEFI BIOS's will detect it and allow you to boot from that drive. + </p> + + <p>(b) As a workaround where, due to a buggy UEFI BIOS, the newly written + bootloader for Mageia will not be recognized at end of the installation. + </p> + + </li> </ul> </div> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Advanced</em></span></p> + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Rozšířené</em></span></p> <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Video mode</em></span></p> + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Video režim</em></span></p> <p>This sets the screen size and colour depth to be used by the boot menu. If you click the down-triangle you will be offered other size and colour depth @@ -418,7 +458,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Do not touch ESP or MBR</em></span></p> + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Neměnit ESP nebo MBR</em></span></p> <p>Select this option if you don't want a bootable Mageia, but would rather chain-load it from another OS. You will get a warning that the bootloader is @@ -459,7 +499,7 @@ <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e1152"></a>Další volby + <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e1160"></a>Další volby </h3> </div> </div> @@ -470,7 +510,7 @@ <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1154"></a>Použití už existujícího zavaděče + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1162"></a>Použití už existujícího zavaděče </h4> </div> </div> @@ -478,7 +518,7 @@ <p>The exact procedure for adding Mageia to an existing bootloader is beyond - the scope of this documentation. However in most cases it will involve + the scope of this documentation. However, in most cases it will involve running the relevant bootloader installation program, which should detect Mageia and automatically add an entry for it in the bootloader menu. See the documentation for the relevant operating system. @@ -486,11 +526,11 @@ </div> - <div class="section" title="Installing Without a Bootloader"> + <div class="section" title="Instalování bez zavaděče"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1157"></a>Installing Without a Bootloader + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1165"></a>Instalování bez zavaděče </h4> </div> </div> diff --git a/cs/software.html b/cs/software.html index b443a44..f4919a5 100644 --- a/cs/software.html +++ b/cs/software.html @@ -121,11 +121,11 @@ </div> - <div lang="cs" class="section" title="Available Media"> + <div lang="cs" class="section" title="Dostupná média"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="media_selection"></a>Available Media + <h4 class="title"><a name="media_selection"></a>Dostupná média </h4> </div> </div> @@ -407,8 +407,8 @@ - <p>Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customize your - installation. + <p>Zde můžete přidat, nebo odebrat extra balíčky a upravit si tak vaši + instalaci. </p> diff --git a/de/add_supplemental_media.html b/de/add_supplemental_media.html index 70d0be5..d3d08e0 100644 --- a/de/add_supplemental_media.html +++ b/de/add_supplemental_media.html @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ - <p>Dieser Bildschirm zeigt eine Liste aller bereits erkannten Repositorys. Sie + <p>Dieser Bildschirm zeigt eine Liste aller bereits erkannten Repositorien. Sie können andere Quellen für das herunterladen von Paketen auswählen, wie optische Laufwerke oder Netzwerkquellen. Die Quellenauswahl bestimmt, welche Pakete während der nächsten Schritte zur Verfügung stehen. diff --git a/de/choosePackageGroups.html b/de/choosePackageGroups.html index a696ff5..c0ad37e 100644 --- a/de/choosePackageGroups.html +++ b/de/choosePackageGroups.html @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ </div> - <p>Siehe <a class="xref" href="minimal-install.html" title="Minimale Installation">Minimal Install</a> für eine Anleitung, wie man eine + <p>Siehe <a class="xref" href="minimal-install.html" title="Minimale Installation">Minimale Installation</a> für eine Anleitung, wie man eine minimale Installation durchführt (ohne oder mit X & IceWM). </p> diff --git a/de/configureX_chooser.html b/de/configureX_chooser.html index cc19d04..777fb52 100644 --- a/de/configureX_chooser.html +++ b/de/configureX_chooser.html @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ <p>Falls nötig, können Sie Ihre spezifische Karte aus einer erweiterten Liste - auswählen. Siehe <a class="xref" href="configureX_card_list.html" title="Einen X-Server auswählen (Ihre Grafikkarte einrichten)">Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)</a>. + auswählen. Siehe <a class="xref" href="configureX_card_list.html" title="Einen X-Server auswählen (Ihre Grafikkarte einrichten)">Einen X-Server auswählen (Ihre Grafikkarte einrichten)</a>. </p> </li> @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ <span class="emphasis"><em>Generisch</em></span> wählen. Wählen Sie <span class="emphasis"><em>Benutzerdefiniert</em></span> wenn Sie es bevorzugen, die horizontale und vertikale Wiederholfrequenz Ihres Bildschirms manuell - einzustellen. Siehe <a class="xref" href="configureX_monitor.html" title="Auswahl des Monitors">Choosing your Monitor</a>. + einzustellen. Siehe <a class="xref" href="configureX_monitor.html" title="Auswahl des Monitors">Auswahl des Monitors</a>. </p> </li> diff --git a/de/diskdrake.html b/de/diskdrake.html index 8f0f22f..0699a9a 100644 --- a/de/diskdrake.html +++ b/de/diskdrake.html @@ -133,15 +133,15 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p>Falls Sie Mageia auf einem UEFI-System installieren, überprüfen Sie, dass - eine ESP (EFI Systempartition) vorhanden und korrekt unter - <code class="filename">/boot/EFI</code> eingebunden ist. Siehe hierzu Abbildung 1. + eine ESP (EFI-Systempartition) vorhanden und korrekt unter + <code class="filename">/boot/EFI</code> eingehangen ist. Siehe hierzu Abbildung 1. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> <p>Falls Sie Mageia auf einem Legacy/GPT System installieren, überprüfe, dass - eine BIOS Bootpartition vorhanden ist und diese den richtigen Dateisystemtyp + eine BIOS-Bootpartition vorhanden ist und diese den richtigen Dateisystemtyp hat. Siehe Abbildung 2 unten. </p> diff --git a/de/doPartitionDisks.html b/de/doPartitionDisks.html index c6965d5..cfc36e0 100644 --- a/de/doPartitionDisks.html +++ b/de/doPartitionDisks.html @@ -275,16 +275,16 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p>Wenn Sie ein UEFI-System nutzen, wird die ESP (EFI System Partition) + <p>Wenn Sie ein UEFI-System nutzen, wird die ESP (EFI-Systempartition) automatisch erkannt - oder erstellt, falls diese noch nicht vorhanden ist - - und als <code class="filename">/boot/EFI</code> eingebunden. Die - <span class="emphasis"><em>Benutzerdefinierte Paritionierung</em></span> Option ist die - einzige Möglichkeit um nachzuprüfen, ob dies erfolgreich durchgeführt wurde. + und als <code class="filename">/boot/EFI</code> eingehangen. Die Option + <span class="emphasis"><em>Benutzerdefinierte Partitionierung</em></span> ist die einzige + Möglichkeit um nachzuprüfen, ob dies erfolgreich durchgeführt wurde. </p> <p>Falls Sie ein Legacy System (bekannt als BIOS) mit einem GPT partitionierten - Laufwerk verwenden, müssen Sie eine BIOS Bootpartition erstellen, falls + Laufwerk verwenden, müssen Sie eine BIOS-Bootpartition erstellen, falls diese noch nicht vorhanden ist. Sie sollte ungefähr 1 MiB groß sein und keinen Einhängepunkt besitzen. Diese kann mit dem Installer unter <span class="emphasis"><em>Benutzerdefinierte Partitionierung</em></span> wie jede andere diff --git a/de/index.html b/de/index.html index 7436358..288a6e7 100644 --- a/de/index.html +++ b/de/index.html @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ <dt><span class="section"><a href="soundConfig.html#soundConfig-Advanced">Fortgeschritten</a></span></dt> </dl> </dd> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="securityLevel.html">Sicherheitsstufe</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="securityLevel.html">Sicherheitsebene</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="installUpdates.html">Aktualisierungen (Updates)</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="exitInstall.html">Herzlichen Glückwunsch!</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="uninstall-Mageia.html">Mageia deinstallieren</a></span></dt> diff --git a/de/installUpdates.html b/de/installUpdates.html index 63e159e..f046555 100644 --- a/de/installUpdates.html +++ b/de/installUpdates.html @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ <meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"> <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Installation mit Hilfe von DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Installation mit Hilfe von DrakX"> - <link rel="prev" href="securityLevel.html" title="Sicherheitsstufe"> + <link rel="prev" href="securityLevel.html" title="Sicherheitsebene"> <link rel="next" href="exitInstall.html" title="Herzlichen Glückwunsch!"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> <!-- body { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } diff --git a/de/minimal-install.html b/de/minimal-install.html index 5e73b8a..6779d2b 100644 --- a/de/minimal-install.html +++ b/de/minimal-install.html @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ einen spezialisierten Arbeitsplatzrechner. Sie werden diese Option vermutlich in Verbindung mit der zuvor erwähnten Option <span class="emphasis"><em>Individuelle Paketauswahl</em></span> verwenden, um - Feineinstellungen für Ihre Installation vorzunehmen. Siehe <a class="xref" href="choosePackagesTree.html" title="Wählen Sie individuelle Pakete">Choose Packages Tree</a>. + Feineinstellungen für Ihre Installation vorzunehmen. Siehe <a class="xref" href="choosePackagesTree.html" title="Wählen Sie individuelle Pakete">Paketbaum auswählen</a>. </p> @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ <p>Durch das Abwählen aller <span class="emphasis"><em>Paketgruppen</em></span> im Auswahlmenü können Sie eine <span class="emphasis"><em>minimale Installation</em></span> durchführen, - siehe <a class="xref" href="choosePackageGroups.html" title="Paketgruppenauswahl">Choose Package Groups</a>. + siehe <a class="xref" href="choosePackageGroups.html" title="Paketgruppenauswahl">Paketgruppen auswählen</a>. </p> diff --git a/de/misc-params.html b/de/misc-params.html index 976990b..1d4f46d 100644 --- a/de/misc-params.html +++ b/de/misc-params.html @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa2a"></a>DrakX wählt eine Zeitzone für Sie, abhängig von der von Ihnen bevorzugten Sprache. Sie können die Zeitzone ändern, falls dies nötig ist. Siehe auch - unter <a class="xref" href="configureTimezoneUTC.html" title="Konfiguration der Zeitzone">Configure Timezone</a></p> + unter <a class="xref" href="configureTimezoneUTC.html" title="Konfiguration der Zeitzone">Zeitzone auswählen</a></p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa3a"></a>Befinden Sie sich nicht im gewählten Land, so ist es sehr wichtig, dass Sie - diese Einstellung korrigieren. Siehe <a class="xref" href="selectCountry.html" title="Wählen des Landes / der Region">Select Country</a></p> + diese Einstellung korrigieren. Siehe <a class="xref" href="selectCountry.html" title="Wählen des Landes / der Region">Land auswählen</a></p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa6b"></a>Sie sollten sehr sorgfältig prüfen, was Sie tun, bevor Sie hier etwas ändern - ein Fehler kann Ihren Computer davon abhalten, korrekt zu - funktionieren. Weitere Informationen finden Sie unter <a class="xref" href="configureServices.html" title="Konfigurieren Ihrer Dienste">Configure Services</a></p> + funktionieren. Weitere Informationen finden Sie unter <a class="xref" href="configureServices.html" title="Konfigurieren Ihrer Dienste">Systemdienste konfigurieren</a></p> </li> </ul> @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa4a"></a>Dieser Abschnitt erlaubt es Ihnen, die Grafikkarte(n) und die Anzeige - einzustellen. Weitere Informationen finden Sie unter <a class="xref" href="configureX_chooser.html" title="Konfiguration der Grafikkarte und des Bildschirms">Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration</a></p> + einzustellen. Weitere Informationen finden Sie unter <a class="xref" href="configureX_chooser.html" title="Konfiguration der Grafikkarte und des Bildschirms">Konfiguration der Grafikkarte und des Bildschirms</a></p> @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-network-pa2"></a>Sie können Ihr Netzwerk hier konfigurieren, für Netzwerkkarten mit nonfree Treibern ist es besser dies nach dem Neustart im Mageia Kontrollzentrum - vorzunehmen, falls Sie die <span class="emphasis"><em>non-free</em></span> Repositorys noch + vorzunehmen, falls Sie die <span class="emphasis"><em>non-free</em></span> Repositorien noch nicht aktiviert haben. </p> @@ -344,10 +344,10 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="misc-params-security-pa1"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Sicherheitsstufe</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-security-pa1"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Sicherheitsebene</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="misc-params-security-pa1a"></a>Die Sicherheitsstufe für Ihren Computer, in den meisten Fällen die + <p><a name="misc-params-security-pa1a"></a>Die Sicherheitsebene für Ihren Computer, in den meisten Fällen die Voreinstellung (Standard), ist für die gewöhnliche Nutzung ausreichend. Wähle die Option, welche am besten zu Ihrem Nutzungsverhalten passt. diff --git a/de/securityLevel.html b/de/securityLevel.html index cfccae1..845f4c4 100644 --- a/de/securityLevel.html +++ b/de/securityLevel.html @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ <head> <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8"> - <title>Sicherheitsstufe</title> + <title>Sicherheitsebene</title> <meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"> <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Installation mit Hilfe von DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Installation mit Hilfe von DrakX"> @@ -13,11 +13,11 @@ table { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } --></style></head> <body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"> - <div lang="de" class="section" title="Sicherheitsstufe"> + <div lang="de" class="section" title="Sicherheitsebene"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h2 class="title"><a name="securityLevel"></a>Sicherheitsstufe + <h2 class="title"><a name="securityLevel"></a>Sicherheitsebene </h2> </div> </div> @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Wählen Sie hier ihre Sicherheitsstufe aus</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Wählen Sie hier ihre Sicherheitsebene aus</strong></span></p> <p><a name="securityLevel-pa1"></a><span class="emphasis"><em>Standard</em></span> ist die Voreinstellung und die empfohlene diff --git a/de/setupBootloader.html b/de/setupBootloader.html index 7528e66..38e9fa2 100644 --- a/de/setupBootloader.html +++ b/de/setupBootloader.html @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>GRUB2-efi oder rEFInd wird möglicherweiße als Bootloader für UEFI-Systeme + <p>GRUB2-efi oder rEFInd wird möglicherweise als Bootloader für UEFI-Systeme verwendet. </p> @@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ <p>Um dies zu tun, müssen Sie /boot/grub2/custom.cfg manuell editieren oder stattdessen die Software grub-customizer verwenden (Verfügbar in den Mageia - Repositorys). + Repositorien). </p> diff --git a/de/setupBootloaderAddEntry.html b/de/setupBootloaderAddEntry.html index 409ef44..9c7910c 100644 --- a/de/setupBootloaderAddEntry.html +++ b/de/setupBootloaderAddEntry.html @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ <p>Um dies zu tun, müssen Sie /boot/grub2/custom.cfg manuell editieren oder stattdessen die Software grub-customizer verwenden (Verfügbar in den Mageia - Repositorys). + Repositorien). </p> diff --git a/de/soundConfig.html b/de/soundConfig.html index b3a28ed..073d080 100644 --- a/de/soundConfig.html +++ b/de/soundConfig.html @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Installation mit Hilfe von DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Installation mit Hilfe von DrakX"> <link rel="prev" href="selectMouse.html" title="Maus auswählen"> - <link rel="next" href="securityLevel.html" title="Sicherheitsstufe"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> + <link rel="next" href="securityLevel.html" title="Sicherheitsebene"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> <!-- body { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } table { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } @@ -23,30 +23,29 @@ </div> </div> - - - - - - + <p>In diesem Bildschirm steht der Name des Treibers, den das + Installationsprogramm für ihre Soundkarte ausgewählt hat, welches der + Standardtreiber ist, wenn einer gefunden wurde. + </p> - <p>Dieser Bildschirm zeigt die Details des vom Installer ausgewählten - Sounkarten-Treiber. Dieser Treiber sollte ohne Probleme funktionieren. + <p>Der Standardtreiber sollte ohne Probleme funktionieren. Wenn Sie jedoch nach + der Installation Probleme feststellen sollten, starten Sie entweder + <span class="command"><strong>draksound</strong></span> oder starte das Werkzeug über das Mageia + Kontrollzentrum (MCC), durch Auswahl des <span class="guilabel">Hardware</span> Tab + und klick auf <span class="guilabel">Soundkonfiguration</span> oben rechts im + Fenster. </p> - - <p>Falls Sie nach der Installation Probleme feststellen sollten, führen Sie - <span class="command"><strong>draksound</strong></span> aus oder starte dieses Werkzeug über - <span class="guimenu">Mageia Kontrollzentrum</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Hardware</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Soundkonfiguration</span>. Klicke im - darauffolgenden <code class="literal">draksound</code> oder - <span class="emphasis"><em>Soundkonfiguration</em></span> Bildschirm auf - <span class="emphasis"><em>Problembehebung</em></span> um nützliche Vorschläge zu erhalten, - wie man das Problem lösen kann. + <p>Mit diesem Tool wählen Sie das Dienstprogramm aus, das die Ein- und Ausgabe + von Audiosignalen steuert. Es stehen pulseaudio und pipewire zur + Verfügung. Für pipewire können Sie zwischen Wireplumber und Pipewire Media + Session als session manager wählen. Wenn Sie die Auswahl der Konfiguration + bestätigt haben, werden die benötigten Pakete installiert und die + Systemdienste eingerichtet. </p> - <div class="section" title="Fortgeschritten"> <div class="titlepage"> @@ -58,14 +57,12 @@ </div> </div> - - <p>Fall kein aktueller Treiber für Ihre Soundkarte vorhanden ist, gibt es - gegebenenfalls alternative Treiber, die ausgewählt werden können. Falls dies - der Fall ist, Sie jedoch finden, dass der Installer nicht die beste Wahl - getroffen hat, können Sie auf <span class="emphasis"><em>Fortgeschrittene Optionen</em></span> - klicken und den Treiber manuell auswählen. + <p>Wenn Sie auf dieser Bildschirmseite auf Erweitert klicken, können Sie die + Konfiguration auf Standardwerte zurücksetzen. </p> + + <p></p> </div> diff --git a/el/Select-and-use-ISOs.html b/el/Select-and-use-ISOs.html index b342e62..4ebaedd 100644 --- a/el/Select-and-use-ISOs.html +++ b/el/Select-and-use-ISOs.html @@ -635,8 +635,8 @@ <p>Όλα τα Mageia ISO είναι υβριδικά. Αυτό σημαίνει ότι μπορείτε να τα - «αποτυπώσετε» σε ένα κλειδί USB και να το χρησιμοποιήσετε για την εκκίνηση - και εγκατάσταση του συστήματος. + αποτυπώσετε σε ένα κλειδί USB και να το χρησιμοποιήσετε για την εκκίνηση και + εγκατάσταση του συστήματος. </p> <div class="warning" title="Προειδοποίηση" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> @@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p>Το <a class="ulink" href="http://rufus.akeo.ie/?locale=en_US" target="_top">Rufus</a> - χρησιμοποιώντας την επιλογή της «εικόνας ISO»· + χρησιμοποιώντας την επιλογή της "εικόνας ISO"· </p> </li> diff --git a/el/choosePackageGroups.html b/el/choosePackageGroups.html index 25e13d9..5932c96 100644 --- a/el/choosePackageGroups.html +++ b/el/choosePackageGroups.html @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ </div> - <p>Ανατρέξτε στο <a class="xref" href="minimal-install.html" title="Ελάχιστη εγκατάσταση">Minimal Install</a> για οδηγίες σχετικά με την + <p>Ανατρέξτε στο <a class="xref" href="minimal-install.html" title="Ελάχιστη εγκατάσταση">Ελάχιστη εγκατάσταση</a> για οδηγίες σχετικά με την ελάχιστη εγκατάσταση (με ή χωρίς X & IceWM). </p> diff --git a/el/configureX_chooser.html b/el/configureX_chooser.html index 56d228d..8108e38 100644 --- a/el/configureX_chooser.html +++ b/el/configureX_chooser.html @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ <p>Αν χρειάζεται, μπορείτε να επιλέξετε μια συγκεκριμένη κάρτα από το - αναπτυσσόμενο κατάστιχο. Ανατρέξτε στο <a class="xref" href="configureX_card_list.html" title="Επιλέξτε έναν εξυπηρετητή X (Διαμόρφωση της κάρτας γραφικών)">Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)</a>. + αναπτυσσόμενο κατάστιχο. Ανατρέξτε στο <a class="xref" href="configureX_card_list.html" title="Επιλέξτε έναν εξυπηρετητή X (Διαμόρφωση της κάρτας γραφικών)">Επιλέξτε έναν εξυπηρετητή X (Διαμόρφωση της κάρτας γραφικών)</a>. </p> </li> @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ <span class="emphasis"><em>Γενικού τύπου</em></span> Επιλέξτε <span class="emphasis"><em>Προσαρμοσμένο</em></span> αν επιθυμείτε να ορίσετε τις οριζόντιες και κάθετες συχνότητες ανανέωσης της οθόνης σας χειροκίνητα. Δείτε σχετικά - στο <a class="xref" href="configureX_monitor.html" title="Επιλογή της οθόνης">Choosing your Monitor</a>. + στο <a class="xref" href="configureX_monitor.html" title="Επιλογή της οθόνης">Επιλογή της οθόνης</a>. </p> </li> diff --git a/el/doPartitionDisks.html b/el/doPartitionDisks.html index 8ef02ad..43aef0f 100644 --- a/el/doPartitionDisks.html +++ b/el/doPartitionDisks.html @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa11"></a>Η κατάτμηση θα πρέπει να είναι «καθαρή» δηλαδή τα Windows πρέπει να έχουν + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa11"></a>Η κατάτμηση θα πρέπει να είναι "καθαρή" δηλαδή τα Windows πρέπει να έχουν κλείσει σωστά την τελευταία φορά που χρησιμοποιήθηκαν. Επίσης θα πρέπει να έχετε κάνει αποκερμάτωση, ωστόσο δεν αποτελεί εγγύηση ότι όλα τα αρχεία στην κατάτμηση έχουν μετακινηθεί εκτός της περιοχής που θα χρησιμοποιηθεί από την diff --git a/el/index.html b/el/index.html index 361cfe0..14d676f 100644 --- a/el/index.html +++ b/el/index.html @@ -81,8 +81,7 @@ <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e1149">Άλλες επιλογές</a></span></dt> </dl> </dd> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.html">Προσθήκη ή επεξεργασία μιας - καταχώρησης στο μενού Εκκίνησης</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.html">Προσθήκη ή επεξεργασία μιας καταχώρησης στο μενού Εκκίνησης</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="misc-params.html">Σύνοψη διαμόρφωσης</a></span></dt> <dd> <dl> diff --git a/el/installer.html b/el/installer.html index c8f4b29..3f2f691 100644 --- a/el/installer.html +++ b/el/installer.html @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ <p>Αν κάνατε την εκκίνηση από ένα κλειδί USB, θα δείτε τις ανωτέρω επιλογές διπλές. Σε αυτήν την περίπτωση, θα πρέπει να επιλέξετε τις καταχωρήσεις με - την κατάληξη «USB». + την κατάληξη "USB". </p> </div> @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ - <p>Αν το σύστημα «παγώνει» κατά την εγκατάσταση, η αιτία μπορεί να οφείλεται + <p>Αν το σύστημα "παγώνει"» κατά την εγκατάσταση, η αιτία μπορεί να οφείλεται στον εντοπισμό του υλικού. Σε αυτή την περίπτωση ο αυτόματος εντοπισμός υλικού μπορεί να παρακαμφθεί και να πραγματοποιηθεί αργότερα. Για να δοκιμάσετε αυτή την επιλογή, πληκτρολογήστε <span class="command"><strong>noauto</strong></span> στην @@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ <p>Αν μετατρέψατε τον σκληρό σας δίσκο από <code class="literal">βασική</code> σε <code class="literal">δυναμική</code> μορφή σε Microsoft Windows, θα πρέπει να γνωρίζετε ότι είναι αδύνατο να εγκαταστήσετε τη Mageia σε αυτόν τον - δίσκο. Για να επιστρέψετε στην «βασική» μορφή, ανατρέξτε στην τεκμηρίωση της + δίσκο. Για να επιστρέψετε στην "βασική" μορφή, ανατρέξτε στην τεκμηρίωση της Microsoft: <a class="ulink" href="http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx" target="_top">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx</a>. </p> diff --git a/el/minimal-install.html b/el/minimal-install.html index 80d5291..c828a1c 100644 --- a/el/minimal-install.html +++ b/el/minimal-install.html @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ <p>Η ελάχιστη εγκατάσταση προορίζεται για αυτούς που θέλουν να κάνουν μια ειδική χρήση της Mageia, όπως έναν εξυπηρετητή ή έναν εξειδικευμένο σταθμό εργασίας. Πιθανώς θα χρησιμοποιήσετε αυτή την επιλογή σε συνδυασμό με την - <span class="emphasis"><em>επιλογή μεμονωμένων πακέτων</em></span>, δείτε <a class="xref" href="choosePackagesTree.html" title="Επιλογή μεμονωμένων πακέτων">Choose Packages Tree</a>. + <span class="emphasis"><em>επιλογή μεμονωμένων πακέτων</em></span>, δείτε <a class="xref" href="choosePackagesTree.html" title="Επιλογή μεμονωμένων πακέτων">Επιλογή δέντρου πακέτων</a>. </p> @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ <p>Μπορείτε να επιλέξετε την <span class="emphasis"><em>Ελάχιστη εγκατάσταση</em></span> αποεπιλέγοντας τα πάντα στην οθόνη επιλογής <span class="emphasis"><em>Ομάδων - πακέτων</em></span>, δείτε <a class="xref" href="choosePackageGroups.html" title="Επιλογή ομάδας πακέτων">Choose Package Groups</a>. + πακέτων</em></span>, δείτε <a class="xref" href="choosePackageGroups.html" title="Επιλογή ομάδας πακέτων">Επιλογή ομάδων πακέτων</a>. </p> diff --git a/el/misc-params.html b/el/misc-params.html index be28efb..c375be3 100644 --- a/el/misc-params.html +++ b/el/misc-params.html @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa2a"></a>Το DrakX επιλέγει μια ζώνη ώρας για εσάς, ανάλογα με την προτιμώμενη - γλώσσα. Αν χρειάζεται μπορείτε να την αλλάξετε. Δείτε επίσης <a class="xref" href="configureTimezoneUTC.html" title="Διαμόρφωση της ζώνης ώρας">Configure Timezone</a></p> + γλώσσα. Αν χρειάζεται μπορείτε να την αλλάξετε. Δείτε επίσης <a class="xref" href="configureTimezoneUTC.html" title="Διαμόρφωση της ζώνης ώρας">Διαμόρφωση της ζώνης ώρας</a></p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa3a"></a>Αν η επιλεγμένη χώρα είναι λανθασμένη, είναι πολύ σημαντικό να διορθώσετε τη - ρύθμιση. Δείτε <a class="xref" href="selectCountry.html" title="Επιλέξτε τη χώρα/περιοχή σας">Select Country</a></p> + ρύθμιση. Δείτε <a class="xref" href="selectCountry.html" title="Επιλέξτε τη χώρα/περιοχή σας">Επιλογή της χώρας</a></p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa4b"></a>Μην αλλάξετε τίποτα, αν δεν γνωρίζετε πως να διαμορφώσετε το GRUB2. Για - περισσότερες πληροφορίες ανατρέξτε στο <a class="xref" href="setupBootloader.html" title="Πρόγραμμα εκκίνησης">Bootloader</a></p> + περισσότερες πληροφορίες ανατρέξτε στο <a class="xref" href="setupBootloader.html" title="Πρόγραμμα εκκίνησης">Πρόγραμμα εκκίνησης</a></p> @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa6b"></a>Θα πρέπει να ελέγξετε προσεκτικά πριν να αλλάξετε οτιδήποτε εδώ - ένα σφάλμα μπορεί να προκαλέσει τη δυσλειτουργία του υπολογιστή σας. Για περισσότερες - πληροφορίες ανατρέξτε στο <a class="xref" href="configureServices.html" title="Διαμορφώστε τις υπηρεσίες σας">Configure Services</a></p> + πληροφορίες ανατρέξτε στο <a class="xref" href="configureServices.html" title="Διαμορφώστε τις υπηρεσίες σας">Διαμόρφωση υπηρεσιών</a></p> </li> </ul> @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa4a"></a>Αυτή η ενότητα σας επιτρέπει να διαμορφώσετε την κάρτα γραφικών σας και τις - οθόνες σας. Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες ανατρέξτε στο <a class="xref" href="configureX_chooser.html" title="Διαμόρφωση της κάρτας γραφικών και της οθόνης">Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration</a></p> + οθόνες σας. Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες ανατρέξτε στο <a class="xref" href="configureX_chooser.html" title="Διαμόρφωση της κάρτας γραφικών και της οθόνης">Διαμόρφωση της κάρτας γραφικών και της οθόνης</a></p> @@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ </p> - <p>Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες, ανατρέξτε στο <a class="xref" href="setupBootloader.html" title="Πρόγραμμα εκκίνησης">Bootloader</a>. + <p>Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες, ανατρέξτε στο <a class="xref" href="setupBootloader.html" title="Πρόγραμμα εκκίνησης">Πρόγραμμα εκκίνησης</a>. </p> diff --git a/el/securityLevel.html b/el/securityLevel.html index 9e3ff7f..4f79caa 100644 --- a/el/securityLevel.html +++ b/el/securityLevel.html @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ </p> - <p>Το <span class="emphasis"><em>Ασφαλής</em></span> δημιουργεί ένα υψηλής προστασίας σύστημα - + <p>Το <span class="emphasis"><em>Secure</em></span> δημιουργεί ένα υψηλής προστασίας σύστημα - για παράδειγμα αν το σύστημα προορίζεται για χρήση ως ένας δημόσιος εξυπηρετητής. </p> @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ <td align="left" valign="top"> <p>Το σύστημα στέλνει τα μηνύματα ως <span class="bold"><strong>Unix - Mailspool</strong></span> μηνύματα και όχι ως «τυπική» SMTP αλληλογραφία: ωστόσο + Mailspool</strong></span> μηνύματα και όχι ως "τυπική" SMTP αλληλογραφία: ωστόσο ο χρήστης πρέπει να έχει οριστεί για να λάβετε την αλληλογραφία! </p> diff --git a/el/selectMouse.html b/el/selectMouse.html index 9d37b57..9b7776e 100644 --- a/el/selectMouse.html +++ b/el/selectMouse.html @@ -27,18 +27,29 @@ - <p><a name="selectMouse-pa1"></a>Αν δεν είστε ευχαριστημένος με - την απόκριση του ποντικιού σας, μπορείτε από εδώ να επιλέξετε κάποιο - άλλο. + + + + + + + + + + + <p><a name="selectMouse-pa1"></a>Αν δεν είστε ευχαριστημένος με την απόκριση του ποντικιού σας, μπορείτε από + εδώ να επιλέξετε κάποιο άλλο. </p> - <p><a name="selectMouse-pa2"></a>Συνήθως, <span class="guimenu">Γενικό</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Οποιοδήποτε PS/2 και USB ποντίκι</span> είναι μια καλή επιλογή. + <p><a name="selectMouse-pa2"></a>Συνήθως, <span class="guimenu">Γενικό</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Οποιοδήποτε + PS/2 και USB ποντίκι</span> είναι μια καλή επιλογή. </p> - <p><a name="selectMouse-pa3"></a>Επιλέξτε <span class="guimenu">Γενικό</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Εξαναγκασμός evdev</span> για να διαμορφώσετε τα κουμπιά που δεν δουλεύουν σε ένα - ποντίκι με έξι ή περισσότερα κουμπιά. + <p><a name="selectMouse-pa3"></a>Επιλέξτε <span class="guimenu">Γενικό</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Εξαναγκασμός + evdev</span> για να διαμορφώσετε τα κουμπιά που δεν + δουλεύουν σε ένα ποντίκι με έξι ή περισσότερα κουμπιά. </p> </div> diff --git a/el/setupBootloader.html b/el/setupBootloader.html index 0267f14..70a3b50 100644 --- a/el/setupBootloader.html +++ b/el/setupBootloader.html @@ -574,8 +574,7 @@ <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="setupBootloaderAddEntry"></a>Προσθήκη ή επεξεργασία μιας - καταχώρησης στο μενού Εκκίνησης + <h4 class="title"><a name="setupBootloaderAddEntry"></a>Προσθήκη ή επεξεργασία μιας καταχώρησης στο μενού Εκκίνησης </h4> </div> </div> @@ -583,9 +582,11 @@ + + <p>Για να το κάνετε αυτό θα πρέπει να επεξεργαστείτε χειροκίνητα το - /boot/grub2/custom.cfg ή να χρησιμοποιήσετε το λογισμικό <span class="bold"><strong>grub-customizer</strong></span> (Διαθέσιμο στα αποθετήρια της - Mageia). + /boot/grub2/custom.cfg ή να χρησιμοποιήσετε το λογισμικό <span class="bold"><strong>grub-customizer</strong></span> (Διαθέσιμο στα αποθετήρια της + Mageia). </p> @@ -598,7 +599,7 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p>Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες ανατρέξτε στο wiki μας <a class="ulink" href="https://wikimageiaorg/en/Grub-efi_and_Mageia" target="_top">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia</a></p> + <p>Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες ανατρέξτε στο wiki μας https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia</p> </td> </tr> diff --git a/el/setupBootloaderAddEntry.html b/el/setupBootloaderAddEntry.html index c1d8f90..0e1a7e6 100644 --- a/el/setupBootloaderAddEntry.html +++ b/el/setupBootloaderAddEntry.html @@ -17,8 +17,7 @@ <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h2 class="title"><a name="setupBootloaderAddEntry"></a>Προσθήκη ή επεξεργασία μιας - καταχώρησης στο μενού Εκκίνησης + <h2 class="title"><a name="setupBootloaderAddEntry"></a>Προσθήκη ή επεξεργασία μιας καταχώρησης στο μενού Εκκίνησης </h2> </div> </div> @@ -26,9 +25,11 @@ + + <p>Για να το κάνετε αυτό θα πρέπει να επεξεργαστείτε χειροκίνητα το - /boot/grub2/custom.cfg ή να χρησιμοποιήσετε το λογισμικό <span class="bold"><strong>grub-customizer</strong></span> (Διαθέσιμο στα αποθετήρια της - Mageia). + /boot/grub2/custom.cfg ή να χρησιμοποιήσετε το λογισμικό <span class="bold"><strong>grub-customizer</strong></span> (Διαθέσιμο στα αποθετήρια της + Mageia). </p> @@ -41,7 +42,7 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p>Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες ανατρέξτε στο wiki μας <a class="ulink" href="https://wikimageiaorg/en/Grub-efi_and_Mageia" target="_top">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia</a></p> + <p>Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες ανατρέξτε στο wiki μας https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia</p> </td> </tr> diff --git a/el/soundConfig.html b/el/soundConfig.html index 6b96f20..50612b0 100644 --- a/el/soundConfig.html +++ b/el/soundConfig.html @@ -23,30 +23,29 @@ </div> </div> - - - - - - + <p>Σε αυτήν την οθόνη δίνεται το όνομα του οδηγού που έχει επιλέξει ο + εγκαταστάτης για την κάρτα ήχου, ο οποίος θα είναι και ο εξ' ορισμού οδηγός + αν έχουμε έναν. + </p> - <p>Αυτή η οθόνη εμφανίζει τις λεπτομέρειες του οδηγού της κάρτας ήχου που - επιλέχτηκε από τον εγκαταστάτη και θα πρέπει να λειτουργεί χωρίς προβλήματα. + <p>Ο προκαθορισμένος οδηγός θα πρέπει να λειτουργεί χωρίς προβλήματα. Ωστόσο, + αν μετά την εγκατάσταση αντιμετωπίζετε προβλήματα, τότε εκτελέστε + <span class="command"><strong>draksound</strong></span> ή εκκινήστε το εργαλείο αυτό από το Κέντρο + Ελέγχου Mageia (MCC), επιλέγοντας την καρτέλα <span class="guilabel">Υλικό</span> και + κάνοντας κλικ στο <span class="guilabel">Διαμόρφωση του ήχου</span> στο επάνω δεξί + μέρος της οθόνης. </p> - - <p>Ωστόσο, αν αντιμετωπίζετε προβλήματα μετά την εγκατάσταση, εκτελέστε την - εντολή <span class="command"><strong>draksound</strong></span> ή ανοίξτε το εργαλείο από το - <span class="guimenu">Κέντρο Ελέγχου Mageia</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Υλικό</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Διαμόρφωση του - ήχου</span>. Στη συνέχεια από το - <code class="literal">draksound</code> ή το <span class="emphasis"><em>Διαμόρφωση του ήχου</em></span> - κάντε κλικ στο <span class="emphasis"><em>Αντιμετώπιση προβλημάτων</em></span> για να βρείτε - συμβουλές για το πως να επιλύσετε το πρόβλημα. + <p>Με αυτό το εργαλείο, μπορείτε να επιλέξετε το σύστημα υποστήριξης του + εξυπηρετητή ήχου, για την διαχείριση του ήχου. Μπορείτε να επιλέξετε μεταξύ + των pulseaudio και pipewire. Για το δεύτερο, μπορείτε να επιλέξετε τον + διαχειριστή συνεδρίας <code class="literal">Wireplumber</code> ή <code class="literal">Pipewire + Media Session</code>. Μετά την εφαρμογή της νέας διαμόρφωσης, θα γίνει η + εγκατάσταση των απαιτούμενων πακέτων και η διαμόρφωση των υπηρεσιών. </p> - <div class="section" title="Για προχωρημένους"> <div class="titlepage"> @@ -58,13 +57,13 @@ </div> </div> - - <p>Αν δεν υπάρχει κάποιος εκ ορισμού οδηγός για την κάρτα ήχου, μπορεί να - υπάρχουν διαθέσιμοι εναλλακτικοί οδηγοί. Αν συμβαίνει αυτό και πιστεύετε ότι - ο εγκαταστάτης δεν έχει κάνει την καλύτερη επιλογή, κάντε κλικ στο - <span class="emphasis"><em>Προηγμένες</em></span> για να καθορίσετε τον οδηγό χειροκίνητα. + <p>Με κλικ στο <span class="bold"><strong><span class="guibutton">Για + προχωρημένους</span></strong></span> σε αυτήν τη οθόνη, έχετε την δυνατότητα + να επαναφέρετε τις ρυθμίσεις του μείκτη ήχου στις αρχικές τιμές. </p> + + <p></p> </div> diff --git a/el/uninstall-Mageia.html b/el/uninstall-Mageia.html index c058f86..f9230c6 100644 --- a/el/uninstall-Mageia.html +++ b/el/uninstall-Mageia.html @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@ - <p>Αν η Mageia δεν σας «έπεισε» ή αν δεν δεν μπορείτε να την απεγκαταστήσετε - σωστά, με λίγα λόγια αν θέλετε να την «ξεφορτωθείτε» - είναι δικαίωμά σας + <p>Αν η Mageia δεν σας "έπεισε" ή αν δεν δεν μπορείτε να την απεγκαταστήσετε + σωστά, με λίγα λόγια αν θέλετε να την "ξεφορτωθείτε" - είναι δικαίωμά σας και η Mageia σας δίνει τη δυνατότητα να το κάνετε εν αντιθέσει άλλων λειτουργικών συστημάτων. </p> diff --git a/et/setupBootloader.html b/et/setupBootloader.html index eb1248c..d164f24 100644 --- a/et/setupBootloader.html +++ b/et/setupBootloader.html @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>EFIndi paigaldamine või uuendamine EFI - süstremartitsioonis.</strong></span></p> + süsteemipartitsioonis.</strong></span></p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -373,11 +373,11 @@ </p> <p>a) paigaldatakse eemaldatavale seadmele (näiteks USB-pulgale), mida saab - eemaldada ja ühendada mõne teise masinaga.kLui alglaadur on salvestatuf + eemaldada ja ühendada mõne teise masinaga.Kui alglaadur on salvestatud /EFI/OOT-i, tunneb UEFI BIOS selle ära ja lubab andmekandja käivitada. </p> - <p>b) hädaabinõuna juhuks, kui v igase UEF IBIOS-i tõttu ei tunta paigaldamise + <p>b) hädaabinõuna juhuks, kui vigase UEFI BIOS-i tõttu ei tunta paigaldamise lõpus äsja kirjutatud Mageia alglaadurit ära. </p> @@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ </ul> </div> - <p>Kui eelmises sektsioonis ei valitud algladuriks rEFIndi, siis saab + <p>Kui eelmises sektsioonis ei valitud alglaaduriks rEFIndi, siis saab tarvitada allpool näidatud alglaaduri seadistamise valikuid: </p> @@ -431,11 +431,11 @@ </p> <p>a) paigaldatakse eemaldatavale seadmele (näiteks USB-pulgale), mida saab - eemaldada ja ühendada mõne teise masinaga.kLui alglaadur on salvestatuf + eemaldada ja ühendada mõne teise masinaga.Kui alglaadur on salvestatud /EFI/OOT-i, tunneb UEFI BIOS selle ära ja lubab andmekandja käivitada. </p> - <p>b) hädaabinõuna juhuks, kui v igase UEF IBIOS-i tõttu ei tunta paigaldamise + <p>b) hädaabinõuna juhuks, kui vigase UEFI BIOS-i tõttu ei tunta paigaldamise lõpus äsja kirjutatud Mageia alglaadurit ära. </p> @@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Ekraanilahutus</em></span></p> <p>Siin saab määrata ekraani suuruse ja värvisügavuse, mida alglaadur - kasutab. Allapoole kolmnurgale klõpsates saab vaiida muute suuruse ja + kasutab. Allapoole kolmnurgale klõpsates saab vaiida muude suuruse ja värvisügavuse valikute seast. </p> @@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ <p>Täpne menetlus, kuidas lisada Mageia olemasolevale agflaadurile, väljub - käesoleva abiteksti raamest .Enamasti on vajalike vastava alglaaduri + käesoleva abiteksti raamest .Enamasti on vajalik vastava alglaaduri paigaldamise programmi käivitamine, mis tuvastab Mageia ja lisab selle kirje automaatselt alglaaduri menüüsse. Täpsemalt kirjeldab seda vastava operatsioonisüsteemi dokumentatsioon. diff --git a/fr/choosePackageGroups.html b/fr/choosePackageGroups.html index 9356c69..e647b59 100644 --- a/fr/choosePackageGroups.html +++ b/fr/choosePackageGroups.html @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ </div> - <p>Consultez <a class="xref" href="minimal-install.html" title="Installation minimale">Minimal Install</a> pour avoir des indications sur + <p>Consultez <a class="xref" href="minimal-install.html" title="Installation minimale">Installation minimale</a> pour avoir des indications sur la manière de réaliser une installation minimale (avec ou sans X & IceWM). </p> diff --git a/fr/configureX_chooser.html b/fr/configureX_chooser.html index d5cddd5..7b72606 100644 --- a/fr/configureX_chooser.html +++ b/fr/configureX_chooser.html @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ <p>Si vous avez besoin, vous pouvez sélectionner une carte spécifique depuis - cette liste déroulante. Voir <a class="xref" href="configureX_card_list.html" title="Choisissez un serveur d'affichage (serveur X)">Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)</a>. + cette liste déroulante. Voir <a class="xref" href="configureX_card_list.html" title="Choisissez un serveur d'affichage (serveur X)">Choisissez un serveur d'affichage (serveur X)</a>. </p> </li> @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ dans la liste des <span class="emphasis"><em>Vendeurs</em></span> ou encore celle des <span class="emphasis"><em>Génériques</em></span>. Choisissez <span class="emphasis"><em>Personnalisé</em></span> Si vous souhaitez spécifier les taux de - rafraîchissement horizontaux et verticaux de votre moniteur. Voir <a class="xref" href="configureX_monitor.html" title="Choisissez un moniteur">Choosing your Monitor</a>. + rafraîchissement horizontaux et verticaux de votre moniteur. Voir <a class="xref" href="configureX_monitor.html" title="Choisissez un moniteur">Choisissez un moniteur</a>. </p> </li> diff --git a/fr/minimal-install.html b/fr/minimal-install.html index 6d81a32..bced414 100644 --- a/fr/minimal-install.html +++ b/fr/minimal-install.html @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ spécialisée. Vous utiliserez probablement cette option en combinaison avec la <span class="emphasis"><em>sélection individuelle des paquetages</em></span> mentionnée ci-dessus, pour régler finement votre installation. Pour plus de détails, - consultez <a class="xref" href="choosePackagesTree.html" title="Choisir individuellement des paquetages">Choose Packages Tree</a>. + consultez <a class="xref" href="choosePackagesTree.html" title="Choisir individuellement des paquetages">Choix de l'arbre des paquets</a>. </p> @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ <p>Il est possible de choisir une <span class="emphasis"><em>installation minimale</em></span>en dé-sélectionnant tout dans l'écran <span class="emphasis"><em>Sélection du groupe de - paquetages</em></span>, voir <a class="xref" href="choosePackageGroups.html" title="Sélection du groupe de paquetages">Choose Package Groups</a>. + paquetages</em></span>, voir <a class="xref" href="choosePackageGroups.html" title="Sélection du groupe de paquetages">Choix des groupes de paquets</a>. </p> diff --git a/fr/misc-params.html b/fr/misc-params.html index 78b38e8..479a002 100644 --- a/fr/misc-params.html +++ b/fr/misc-params.html @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa2a"></a>DrakX sélectionne un fuseau horaire en fonction de la langue choisie. Vous - pouvez le modifier si nécessaire. Voir aussi <a class="xref" href="configureTimezoneUTC.html" title="Configurer le fuseau horaire">Configure Timezone</a></p> + pouvez le modifier si nécessaire. Voir aussi <a class="xref" href="configureTimezoneUTC.html" title="Configurer le fuseau horaire">Configurer le fuseau horaire</a></p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa3a"></a>Si le pays sélectionné est erroné, il est très important de rectifier ce - paramètre. Voir <a class="xref" href="selectCountry.html" title="Sélection du Pays / Région">Select Country</a></p> + paramètre. Voir <a class="xref" href="selectCountry.html" title="Sélection du Pays / Région">Sélection d'un pays</a></p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa4b"></a>Ne rien modifier a moins de connaître comment configurer GRUB2. Pour plus - d'informations, voir <a class="xref" href="setupBootloader.html" title="Programme d'amorçage">Bootloader</a></p> + d'informations, voir <a class="xref" href="setupBootloader.html" title="Programme d'amorçage">Programme d'amorçage</a></p> @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa6b"></a>Soyez sûrs de ce que vous faîtes avant de changer quoi que ce soit ici - une erreur peut empêcher le fonctionnement correct de l'ordinateur. Pour plus - d'informations, voir <a class="xref" href="configureServices.html" title="Configurer les Services">Configure Services</a></p> + d'informations, voir <a class="xref" href="configureServices.html" title="Configurer les Services">Configurer les services</a></p> </li> </ul> @@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa4a"></a>Cette partie permet la configuration de la(des) carte(s) graphique(s) et de - l'affichage. Pour plus d'informations, voir <a class="xref" href="configureX_chooser.html" title="Configuration de la carte graphique et du moniteur">Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration</a></p> + l'affichage. Pour plus d'informations, voir <a class="xref" href="configureX_chooser.html" title="Configuration de la carte graphique et du moniteur">Configuration de la carte graphique et du moniteur</a></p> diff --git a/fr/soundConfig.html b/fr/soundConfig.html index b50b4b6..f16ece5 100644 --- a/fr/soundConfig.html +++ b/fr/soundConfig.html @@ -23,31 +23,28 @@ </div> </div> - - - - - - + <p>Cet écran affiche le nom du pilote que l'installeur a choisi pour votre + carte son. Ce sera le pilote par défaut, s'il existe. + </p> - <p>Cet écran affiche les détails concernant le pilote choisi par l'installeur - pour votre carte son, et ce pilote devrait fonctionner sans problème. + <p>Le pilote par défaut devrait fontionner sans problème. Cependant, si après + l'installation vous rencontrez des soucis, lancez la commande + <span class="command"><strong>draksound</strong></span> ou bien démarrez cet outil via le CCM (Centre + de Contrôle de Mageia), en sélectionnant l'onglet + <span class="guilabel">Matériel</span> puis en cliquant sur <span class="guilabel">Configuration + du son</span> en haut à droite de l'écran. </p> - - <p>Néanmoins, si vous rencontrez des problèmes après l'installation, alors - lancez <span class="command"><strong>draksound</strong></span> ou démarrez cet outil via le - <span class="guimenu">Centre de Contrôle - Mageia</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Matériel</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Configuration - du son</span>. Ensuite, à l'intérieur de - <code class="literal">draksound</code> ou de <span class="emphasis"><em>Configuration du - son</em></span>, cliquez sur <span class="emphasis"><em>Dépannage</em></span> pour obtenir des - conseils utiles et résoudre votre problème. + <p>Avec cet outil, vous pouvez choisir l'infrastructure qui servira de serveur + de son. Vous avez le choix entre pulseaudio et pipewire. Pour le second, + vous pouvez choisir un gestionnaire de session parmi + <code class="literal">Wireplumber</code> ou <code class="literal">Pipewire media + session</code>. Après validation de votre choix, les paquets nécessaires + seront installés et les services seront configurés. </p> - <div class="section" title="Avancé"> <div class="titlepage"> @@ -59,13 +56,13 @@ </div> </div> - - <p>S'il n'existe aucun pilote par défaut pour votre carte son, il est peut-être - possible de choisir parmi d'autres pilotes. Si c'est le cas, ou si vous - pensez que l'installeur n'a pas fait le meilleur choix, cliquez sur - <span class="emphasis"><em>Avancé</em></span> pour choisir le pilote manuellement. + <p>Cliquer sur <span class="bold"><strong><span class="guibutton">Avancé</span></strong></span> + sur cet écran pour avoir le choix de remettre aux valeurs initiales la + configuration du mixeur de son. </p> + + <p></p> </div> diff --git a/ja/choosePackageGroups.html b/ja/choosePackageGroups.html index 5432b06..4839399 100644 --- a/ja/choosePackageGroups.html +++ b/ja/choosePackageGroups.html @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ </div> - <p>最小構成インストールを行う方法の説明 (X や IceWM を含まない場合と含む場合) については <a class="xref" href="minimal-install.html" title="最小構成インストール">Minimal Install</a> を参照してください。 + <p>最小構成インストールを行う方法の説明 (X や IceWM を含まない場合と含む場合) については <a class="xref" href="minimal-install.html" title="最小構成インストール">最小構成インストール</a> を参照してください。 </p> </div> diff --git a/ja/configureX_chooser.html b/ja/configureX_chooser.html index 0cbaacd..11ec6b2 100644 --- a/ja/configureX_chooser.html +++ b/ja/configureX_chooser.html @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ <p><a name="configureX_chooser-pa2"></a><span class="bold"><strong>グラフィックス カード</strong></span></p> - <p>必要があれば、この展開可能な一覧から特定のカードを選択できます。<a class="xref" href="configureX_card_list.html" title="X サーバを選択する (グラフィック カードを設定する)">Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)</a> + <p>必要があれば、この展開可能な一覧から特定のカードを選択できます。<a class="xref" href="configureX_card_list.html" title="X サーバを選択する (グラフィック カードを設定する)">X サーバを選択する (グラフィック カードを設定する)</a> を参照してください。 </p> @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ <p>お使いのモニタが対応していればプラグ アンド - プレイを選択でき、そうでなければ<span class="emphasis"><em>ベンダ</em></span>もしくは<span class="emphasis"><em>一般</em></span>の一覧からお使いのモニタを選択します。お使いのモニタの水平走査周波数と垂直走査周波数を手動で設定したいのであれば、<a class="xref" href="configureX_monitor.html" title="モニタを選択する">Choosing your Monitor</a> を参照してください。 + プレイを選択でき、そうでなければ<span class="emphasis"><em>ベンダ</em></span>もしくは<span class="emphasis"><em>一般</em></span>の一覧からお使いのモニタを選択します。お使いのモニタの水平走査周波数と垂直走査周波数を手動で設定したいのであれば、<a class="xref" href="configureX_monitor.html" title="モニタを選択する">モニタを選択する</a> を参照してください。 </p> </li> diff --git a/ja/minimal-install.html b/ja/minimal-install.html index 6bef33d..b40e644 100644 --- a/ja/minimal-install.html +++ b/ja/minimal-install.html @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ <p>最小構成のインストールは Mageia - をサーバや専門のワークステーションといった特定の用途を念頭に置いて使用することが意図されます。この選択はおそらくは<span class="emphasis"><em>パッケージを個別に選択</em></span>と組み合わせて行うことになるでしょう。インストールを細かく調整するには、<a class="xref" href="choosePackagesTree.html" title="パッケージを個別に選択する">Choose Packages Tree</a> を参照してください。 + をサーバや専門のワークステーションといった特定の用途を念頭に置いて使用することが意図されます。この選択はおそらくは<span class="emphasis"><em>パッケージを個別に選択</em></span>と組み合わせて行うことになるでしょう。インストールを細かく調整するには、<a class="xref" href="choosePackagesTree.html" title="パッケージを個別に選択する">パッケージ ツリーを選択する</a> を参照してください。 </p> @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="emphasis"><em>パッケージ - グループの選択</em></span>画面ですべてを選択解除することで<span class="emphasis"><em>最小構成インストール</em></span>を選択できます。<a class="xref" href="choosePackageGroups.html" title="パッケージ グループの選択">Choose Package Groups</a> をご覧ください。 + グループの選択</em></span>画面ですべてを選択解除することで<span class="emphasis"><em>最小構成インストール</em></span>を選択できます。<a class="xref" href="choosePackageGroups.html" title="パッケージ グループの選択">パッケージ グループを選択する</a> をご覧ください。 </p> diff --git a/ja/misc-params.html b/ja/misc-params.html index 331bee2..47d9268 100644 --- a/ja/misc-params.html +++ b/ja/misc-params.html @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa2"></a><span class="bold"><strong>タイムゾーン</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa2a"></a>DrakX は指定された言語からタイムゾーンを選択します。必要があれば変更することができます。<a class="xref" href="configureTimezoneUTC.html" title="タイムゾーンを設定する">Configure Timezone</a> も参照してください。 + <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa2a"></a>DrakX は指定された言語からタイムゾーンを選択します。必要があれば変更することができます。<a class="xref" href="configureTimezoneUTC.html" title="タイムゾーンを設定する">タイムゾーンを設定する</a> も参照してください。 </p> </li> @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa3"></a><span class="bold"><strong>国 / 地域</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa3a"></a>選択されている国にあなたがいない場合、この設定を修正することは非常に重要です。<a class="xref" href="selectCountry.html" title="国や地域を選択する">Select Country</a> + <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa3a"></a>選択されている国にあなたがいない場合、この設定を修正することは非常に重要です。<a class="xref" href="selectCountry.html" title="国や地域を選択する">国を選択する</a> を参照してください。 </p> @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ </p> - <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa4b"></a>GRUB2 の設定方法をご存知でなければ、何も変更しないでください。詳しい情報は、<a class="xref" href="setupBootloader.html" title="ブートローダ">Bootloader</a> + <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa4b"></a>GRUB2 の設定方法をご存知でなければ、何も変更しないでください。詳しい情報は、<a class="xref" href="setupBootloader.html" title="ブートローダ">ブートローダ</a> を参照してください。 </p> @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa6b"></a>ここにあるどれを変更するとしても、その前に慎重に確認してください - - 間違えるとコンピュータが正しく動作しなくなるかもしれません。詳しい情報は、<a class="xref" href="configureServices.html" title="サービスを設定する">Configure Services</a> + 間違えるとコンピュータが正しく動作しなくなるかもしれません。詳しい情報は、<a class="xref" href="configureServices.html" title="サービスを設定する">サービスを設定する</a> を参照してください。 </p> @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa4"></a><span class="bold"><strong>グラフィカル インターフェース</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa4a"></a>このセクションではお使いのグラフィック カードとディスプレイの設定が可能です。詳しい情報は、<a class="xref" href="configureX_chooser.html" title="グラフィックス カードとモニタを設定する">Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration</a> を参照してください。 + <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa4a"></a>このセクションではお使いのグラフィック カードとディスプレイの設定が可能です。詳しい情報は、<a class="xref" href="configureX_chooser.html" title="グラフィックス カードとモニタを設定する">グラフィックス カードとモニタを設定する</a> を参照してください。 </p> diff --git a/ja/soundConfig.html b/ja/soundConfig.html index baf1103..48cfcdd 100644 --- a/ja/soundConfig.html +++ b/ja/soundConfig.html @@ -22,25 +22,24 @@ </div> </div> </div> - - - - - - - - <p>この画面はインストーラが選択したサウンド カード ドライバの詳細を表示し、このドライバは問題なく動作するはずです。</p> - + <p>この画面ではお使いのサウンド カード向けにインストーラが選択したドライバの名前が表示され、これはサウンド + カードが存在する場合にその既定のドライバとなります。 + </p> - <p>しかし、インストールの後で何か問題に出くわした場合、<span class="command"><strong>draksound</strong></span> を実行するか、このツールを - <span class="guimenu">Mageia コントロール センター</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">ハードウェア</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">サウンドの設定</span> から開始してください。次に、<code class="literal">draksound</code> - または<span class="emphasis"><em>サウンド設定</em></span>の画面で、<span class="emphasis"><em>トラブルシューティング</em></span>を押して問題解決方法についての有用なアドバイスを探してください。 + <p>既定のドライバは問題なく動作するはずです。しかしながら、インストール後に問題に出くわした場合、<span class="command"><strong>draksound</strong></span> + を実行するか、このツールを MCC (Mageia コントロール センター) + を通して開始し、後者は<span class="guilabel">ハードウェア</span> + タブを選択後に画面右上の<span class="guilabel">サウンドの設定</span>を選択します。 + </p> + + <p>このツールでは、サウンド サーバのバックエンドを選択でき、つまりサウンドを管理できます。選択肢は pulseaudio と pipewire + です。後者の場合、セッション マネージャを <code class="literal">Wireplumber</code> と <code class="literal">Pipewire + Media Session</code> から選びます。新しい設定を適用後、必要なパッケージがインストールされ、サービスが設定されます。 </p> - <div class="section" title="上級"> <div class="titlepage"> @@ -52,11 +51,12 @@ </div> </div> - - <p>お使いのサウンド - カード向けの既定のドライバがなければ、代替として使用できるドライバがあるかもしれません。これに該当し、インストーラが最適な選択をしなかったとお考えの場合、<span class="emphasis"><em>上級</em></span>をクリックしてドライバを手動で指定することができます。 + <p>この画面の<span class="bold"><strong><span class="guibutton">上級</span></strong></span>をクリックした後、サウンド + ミキサー設定を既定値にリセットすることが可能です。 </p> + + <p></p> </div> diff --git a/nb/Select-and-use-ISOs.html b/nb/Select-and-use-ISOs.html index e21e027..6efd94b 100644 --- a/nb/Select-and-use-ISOs.html +++ b/nb/Select-and-use-ISOs.html @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Hver ISO inneholder kune et skrivebordsmiljø (Plasma, GNOME eller Xfce).</p> + <p>Hver ISO inneholder kun ett skrivebordsmiljø (Plasma, GNOME eller Xfce).</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -515,7 +515,7 @@ - <p>I mellomtiden vil et vindu for å laste ned den valgte ISO åpnes:</p> + <p>I mellomtiden vil et vindu for å laste ned den valgte ISO-en åpnes:</p> <p>Klikk på <span class="emphasis"><em>Lagre fil</em></span>, så klikk <span class="emphasis"><em>OK</em></span>. @@ -572,8 +572,8 @@ - <p>og sammenlign det oppnådde nummeret på datamaskinen din (du må kanskje vente - en stund) med nummeret gitt av Mageia. + <p>og sammenlign resultatet (du må kansje vente liit) på datamaskinen din (du + må kanskje vente en stund) med ISO sjekksummen fra Mageia. </p> </div> @@ -596,11 +596,11 @@ lage et oppstartbart medium. </p> - <div class="section" title="Brenner ISO til en CD/DVD"> + <div class="section" title="Brenner ISO-filen til en CD/DVD"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e170"></a>Brenner ISO til en CD/DVD + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e170"></a>Brenner ISO-filen til en CD/DVD </h4> </div> </div> diff --git a/nb/choosePackageGroups.html b/nb/choosePackageGroups.html index 88799ad..dd9643e 100644 --- a/nb/choosePackageGroups.html +++ b/nb/choosePackageGroups.html @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Tjener</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Server</strong></span></p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ </div> - <p>Se <a class="xref" href="minimal-install.html" title="Minimal Installasjon">Minimal Install</a> for instruksjoner om hvordan du gjør + <p>Se <a class="xref" href="minimal-install.html" title="Minimal Installasjon">Minimal Installasjon</a> for instruksjoner om hvordan du gjør en minimal installasjon (uten eller med X & IceWM). </p> diff --git a/nb/configureX_card_list.html b/nb/configureX_card_list.html index b5c9fdf..c541d53 100644 --- a/nb/configureX_card_list.html +++ b/nb/configureX_card_list.html @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ <head> <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8"> - <title>Velg en X-tjener (Konfigurer grafikk kortet ditt)</title> + <title>Velg en X-server (Konfigurer grafikk kortet ditt)</title> <meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"> <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Installasjon med DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Installasjon med DrakX"> @@ -13,11 +13,11 @@ table { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } --></style></head> <body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"> - <div lang="nb" class="section" title="Velg en X-tjener (Konfigurer grafikk kortet ditt)"> + <div lang="nb" class="section" title="Velg en X-server (Konfigurer grafikk kortet ditt)"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h2 class="title"><a name="configureX_card_list"></a>Velg en X-tjener (Konfigurer grafikk kortet ditt) + <h2 class="title"><a name="configureX_card_list"></a>Velg en X-server (Konfigurer grafikk kortet ditt) </h2> </div> </div> diff --git a/nb/configureX_chooser.html b/nb/configureX_chooser.html index b142d45..ac45ac6 100644 --- a/nb/configureX_chooser.html +++ b/nb/configureX_chooser.html @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Installasjon med DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Installasjon med DrakX"> <link rel="prev" href="addUser.html" title="Brukerhåndtering"> - <link rel="next" href="configureX_card_list.html" title="Velg en X-tjener (Konfigurer grafikk kortet ditt)"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> + <link rel="next" href="configureX_card_list.html" title="Velg en X-server (Konfigurer grafikk kortet ditt)"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> <!-- body { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } table { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ <p>Hvis du trenger, kan du velge et bestemt kort fra denne utvidbare listen. Se - <a class="xref" href="configureX_card_list.html" title="Velg en X-tjener (Konfigurer grafikk kortet ditt)">Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)</a>. + <a class="xref" href="configureX_card_list.html" title="Velg en X-server (Konfigurer grafikk kortet ditt)">Velg en X-server (Konfigurer grafikk kortet ditt)</a>. </p> </li> @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ l<span class="emphasis"><em>everandøren</em></span> eller den <span class="emphasis"><em>generisk listen.</em></span> Velg <span class="emphasis"><em>Tilpasset</em></span> hvis du foretrekker å angi horisontal og vertikal oppdateringshastighet på skjermen - manuelt. Se<a class="xref" href="configureX_monitor.html" title="Velg en monitor">Choosing your Monitor</a>. + manuelt. Se<a class="xref" href="configureX_monitor.html" title="Velg en monitor">Velg en monitor</a>. </p> </li> diff --git a/nb/configureX_monitor.html b/nb/configureX_monitor.html index 1ca1cfc..efc7e32 100644 --- a/nb/configureX_monitor.html +++ b/nb/configureX_monitor.html @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ <meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"> <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Installasjon med DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Installasjon med DrakX"> - <link rel="prev" href="configureX_card_list.html" title="Velg en X-tjener (Konfigurer grafikk kortet ditt)"> + <link rel="prev" href="configureX_card_list.html" title="Velg en X-server (Konfigurer grafikk kortet ditt)"> <link rel="next" href="setupBootloader.html" title="Oppstartslaster"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> <!-- body { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } diff --git a/nb/index.html b/nb/index.html index 38edb0c..c83b978 100644 --- a/nb/index.html +++ b/nb/index.html @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ </dl> </dd> <dt><span class="section"><a href="configureX_chooser.html">Konfigurasjon av Grafikkort og Skjerm</a></span></dt> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="configureX_card_list.html">Velg en X-tjener (Konfigurer grafikk kortet ditt)</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="configureX_card_list.html">Velg en X-server (Konfigurer grafikk kortet ditt)</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="configureX_monitor.html">Velg en monitor</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html">Oppstartslaster</a></span></dt> <dd> diff --git a/nb/minimal-install.html b/nb/minimal-install.html index 9db465c..db78cb9 100644 --- a/nb/minimal-install.html +++ b/nb/minimal-install.html @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ som for eksempel en server eller en spesialisert arbeidsstasjon. Du vil bruke dette alternativet kombinert med alternativet <span class="emphasis"><em> Individuell pakkevalg</em></span> som er nevnt ovenfor, for å finjustere installasjonen - din, se <a class="xref" href="choosePackagesTree.html" title="Individuelt pakkevalg">Choose Packages Tree</a>. + din, se <a class="xref" href="choosePackagesTree.html" title="Individuelt pakkevalg">Velg Pakketre</a>. </p> @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p>Du kan velge en <span class="emphasis"><em>Minimal Installasjon</em></span> av avmarkere alt i - <span class="emphasis"><em>Pakkegruppen Valg </em></span>skjermen se <a class="xref" href="choosePackageGroups.html" title="Valg pakkegruppe">Choose Package Groups</a>. + <span class="emphasis"><em>Pakkegruppen Valg </em></span>skjermen se <a class="xref" href="choosePackageGroups.html" title="Valg pakkegruppe">Velg Pakkegruppe</a>. </p> diff --git a/nb/misc-params.html b/nb/misc-params.html index 0cac44e..d67ecc9 100644 --- a/nb/misc-params.html +++ b/nb/misc-params.html @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa2a"></a>DrakX velger en tidssone for deg, basert på det språket du har valgt. Du kan - endre dette om nødvendig. Se også <a class="xref" href="configureTimezoneUTC.html" title="Sett opp tidssonen din">Configure Timezone</a></p> + endre dette om nødvendig. Se også <a class="xref" href="configureTimezoneUTC.html" title="Sett opp tidssonen din">Konfigurer Tidssone</a></p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa3a"></a>Hvis du har valgt feil land, er det svært viktig at du korrigerer - innstillingen. Se <a class="xref" href="selectCountry.html" title="Velg Land/Region">Select Country</a></p> + innstillingen. Se <a class="xref" href="selectCountry.html" title="Velg Land/Region">Velg Land</a></p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa4b"></a>Ikke gjør endringer hvis du ikke vet hvordan du konfigurerer Grub2. For - ytterligere info, se <a class="xref" href="setupBootloader.html" title="Oppstartslaster">Bootloader</a></p> + ytterligere info, se <a class="xref" href="setupBootloader.html" title="Oppstartslaster">Oppstartslaster</a></p> @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa6b"></a>Du bør sjekke nøye før du endrer noe her - en feil kan forhindre at - datamaskinen din fungerer som den skal. For mer informasjon, se <a class="xref" href="configureServices.html" title="Konfigurer tjenestene dine">Configure Services</a></p> + datamaskinen din fungerer som den skal. For mer informasjon, se <a class="xref" href="configureServices.html" title="Konfigurer tjenestene dine">Konfigurer Tjenester</a></p> </li> </ul> @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa4"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Grafisk grensesnitt</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa4a"></a>Denne seksjonen lar deg konfigurere grafikkkort og skjermer, se<a class="xref" href="configureX_chooser.html" title="Konfigurasjon av Grafikkort og Skjerm">Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration</a></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa4a"></a>Denne seksjonen lar deg konfigurere grafikkkort og skjermer, se<a class="xref" href="configureX_chooser.html" title="Konfigurasjon av Grafikkort og Skjerm">Konfigurasjon av Grafikkort og Skjerm</a></p> diff --git a/nb/selectMouse.html b/nb/selectMouse.html index 01a6a28..8e42d13 100644 --- a/nb/selectMouse.html +++ b/nb/selectMouse.html @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ - <p><a name="selectMouse-pa1"></a>Hvis du ikke er fornøyd med hvordan musa virker, kan du velge en annen her. + <p><a name="selectMouse-pa1"></a>Hvis du ikke er fornøyd med hvordan musen virker, kan du velge en annen her. </p> diff --git a/nb/soundConfig.html b/nb/soundConfig.html index 6ef6d70..c6dc905 100644 --- a/nb/soundConfig.html +++ b/nb/soundConfig.html @@ -23,30 +23,28 @@ </div> </div> - - - - - - + <p>I dette skjermbildet vises navnet på driveren som installasjonen valgte for + lydkortet ditt, dette vil være standarddriveren, dersom vi det finnes en + standard driver. + </p> - <p>Denne skjermen viser detaljene til lydkortdriveren som ble valgt av - installatøren, og denne driveren bør fungere uten problemer. + <p>Standard driveren skal fungere uten problemer. Men hvis du etter + installasjon støter på problemer, kjør dar <span class="command"><strong>draksound</strong></span> + eller start dette verktøyetvia MCC (Mageia Control Center), gjennom å velge + <span class="guilabel">Maskinvare</span> fliken og klikk på <span class="guilabel">Lyd + Konfigurasjon</span> på skjermens høyre topp. </p> - - <p>Men hvis du støter på problemer etter installering, kjør du - <span class="command"><strong>draksound</strong></span> eller start dette verktøyet via - <span class="guimenu">Mageia Control Center</span> → <span class="guimenuitem"> - Maskinvare</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Lydkonfigurasjon</span>. Deretter klikker - du på Feilsøking i <code class="literal">draksound-</code> eller - <span class="emphasis"><em>Lydkonfigurasjon</em></span>-skjermen for å finne nyttige råd om - hvordan du løser problemet. + <p>Med dette verktøyet kan du velge hvilken backend som skal bli lydserveren, + så administrer lyden. Du har valget mellom pulsaudio og pipewire. For det + andre kan du velge en øktleder <code class="literal">Wireplumber</code> eller + <code class="literal">Pipewire Media Session</code>. Etter å ha brukt den nye + konfigurasjonen, vil de nødvendige pakkene bli installert og tjenestene + konfigurert. </p> - <div class="section" title="Avansert"> <div class="titlepage"> @@ -58,13 +56,13 @@ </div> </div> - - <p>Hvis det ikke finnes en standarddriver for lydkortet ditt, kan det finnes - andre mulige alternative drivere tilgjengelig å velge mellom. Hvis dette er - tilfelle, men du tror installereren ikke har gjort det riktige valget, kan - du klikke på <span class="emphasis"><em>Avansert</em></span> for å angi en driver manuelt. + <p>Ved å klikke på<span class="bold"><strong><span class="guibutton"> Avansert + </span></strong></span>i dette skjermbildet vil du få valget å tilbakestille + lydmikserkonfigurasjonen til standardverdier. </p> + + <p></p> </div> diff --git a/nl/addUser.html b/nl/addUser.html index abd9176..5c4d83c 100644 --- a/nl/addUser.html +++ b/nl/addUser.html @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Installeren met DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Installeren met DrakX"> <link rel="prev" href="software.html" title="Software"> - <link rel="next" href="graphicalConfiguration.html" title="Graphical Configuration"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> + <link rel="next" href="graphicalConfiguration.html" title="Grafische configuratie"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> <!-- body { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } table { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } @@ -22,6 +22,10 @@ </div> </div> </div> + + + + @@ -50,13 +54,10 @@ <p>Voor elke Mageia installatie wordt aanbevolen een - <code class="literal">superuser-wachtwoord</code> (beheerderswachtwoord) in te - stellen. In Linux heet dit gewoonlijk het - <span class="emphasis"><em>rootwachtwoord</em></span>. Terwijl u een wachtwoord in het - bovenste tekstvak typt, zal het schildje ernaast van rood via geel in groen - verkleuren, afhankelijk van de sterkte van het wachtwoord. Een groen schild - betekent dat u een goed wachtwoord heeft. Herhaal het wachtwoord in het - volgende vak, ter controle om typefouten uit te sluiten. + <code class="literal">superuser-</code> (beheerders-)wachtwoord in te stellen. In + Linux heet dit gewoonlijk het <span class="emphasis"><em>root-</em></span>wachtwoord. U moet + hetzelfde wachtwoord herhalen in het vak eronder, ter controle om typefouten + uit te sluiten. </p> @@ -69,6 +70,13 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> + <p>Terwijl u een wachtwoord in het bovenste tekstvak typt, zal het schildje + ernaast van rood via geel in groen verkleuren, afhankelijk van de sterkte + van het wachtwoord. Een groen schild betekent dat u een sterk wachtwoord + heeft. + </p> + + <p>Alle wachtwoorden zijn hoofdlettergevoelig. In een wachtwoord is het het beste een mengeling te gebruiken van hoofdletters en kleine letters, cijfers en andere tekens. @@ -96,7 +104,7 @@ <p>Voeg hier een gebruiker toe. Een gebruiker heeft minder rechten dan de <code class="literal">superuser</code> (root), maar genoeg om te internetten, - kantoortoepassingen te gebruiken, te gamen en al het andere te doen waar een + kantoorprogramma's te gebruiken, te gamen en al het andere te doen waar een normaal mens zijn computer voor gebruikt. </p> @@ -127,6 +135,8 @@ <p>Voer hier de inlognaam van de gebruiker in, of laat DrakX er een kiezen op basis van de volledige naam. <span class="bold"><strong>De inlognaam is hoofdlettergevoelig.</strong></span></p> + + </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -134,13 +144,14 @@ <p><span class="bold"><strong>Wachtwoord</strong></span></p> - <p>Typ het wachtwoord van de gebruiker. Aan het eind van het tekstvak is een - schild dat de sterkte van het wachtwoord weergeeft. (Zie ook <a class="xref" href="addUser.html#givePassword" title="Opmerking">Opmerking</a>) + <p>Voer het wachtwoord van de gebruiker in (met inachtneming van het advies in + de opmerking hierboven). </p> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Wachtwoord (nogmaals):</strong></span> Herhaal het - gebruikerswachtwoord. DrakX zal checken of beide wachtwoorden gelijk zijn. + gebruikerswachtwoord. DrakX zal controleren of beide wachtwoorden gelijk + zijn. </p> </li> diff --git a/nl/configureServices.html b/nl/configureServices.html index 8478c0a..cb2028f 100644 --- a/nl/configureServices.html +++ b/nl/configureServices.html @@ -35,7 +35,8 @@ - <p><a name="configureServices-pa1"></a>Here you can choose which services should start when you boot your system. + <p><a name="configureServices-pa1"></a>Hier kunt u instellen welke diensten moeten starten als u uw systeem + opstart. </p> @@ -43,14 +44,14 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="configureServices-pa2"></a>Click on a triangle to expand a group to all the relevant services. The - settings DrakX chose are usually good. + <p><a name="configureServices-pa2"></a>Klik op een > om een groep uit te vouwen en alle diensten daarin te zien. De + door DrakX gekozen instellingen zijn doorgaans goed. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="configureServices-pa4"></a>Als u op een service klikt, ziet u er wat informatie over in het info-vak + <p><a name="configureServices-pa4"></a>Als u op een dienst klikt, ziet u er wat informatie over in het info-vak beneden. </p> diff --git a/nl/diskPartitioning.html b/nl/diskPartitioning.html index 5b43543..f53864c 100644 --- a/nl/diskPartitioning.html +++ b/nl/diskPartitioning.html @@ -28,11 +28,11 @@ - <div lang="nl" class="section" title="Suggested Partitioning"> + <div lang="nl" class="section" title="Voorgestelde partitionering"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="doPartitionDisks"></a>Suggested Partitioning + <h3 class="title"><a name="doPartitionDisks"></a>Voorgestelde partitionering </h3> </div> </div> @@ -54,24 +54,29 @@ - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa1"></a>In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) along with the - DrakX partitioning proposals for where to install Mageia. + + + + + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa1"></a>In dit scherm kunt u de inhoud van uw harde schijf (schijven) zien met de + DrakX-partitioneringsvoorstellen betreffende de ruimte om Mageia in te + installeren. </p> - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa2"></a>The actual options available from those shown below will vary according to - the layout and content of your particular hard drive(s). + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa2"></a>Welke opties van de lijst hieronder op uw systeem beschikbaar zijn hangt af + van de indeling en de inhoud van uw specifieke harde schijf (schijven). </p> - <div class="itemizedlist" title="Main Options"> - <p class="title"><b>Main Options</b></p> + <div class="itemizedlist" title="Belangrijkste opties"> + <p class="title"><b>Belangrijkste opties</b></p> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa4"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Use Existing Partitions</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa4"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Gebruik bestaande partities</strong></span></p> <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa5"></a>Als deze optie beschikbaar is, werden bestaande Linux compatibele partities @@ -81,7 +86,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa6"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Use Free Space</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa6"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Gebruik de vrije ruimte</strong></span></p> <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa7"></a>Als u ongebruikte ruimte op uw harde schijf heeft die u voor uw nieuwe @@ -91,30 +96,20 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa8"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Use Free Space on a Windows Partition</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa8"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Gebruik de vrije ruimte op een + Windows-partitie</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="suggestedPartitioning-pa9"></a>If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may - offer to use it. This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia - installation, but is a risky operation so you should make sure you have - backed up all important files! + <p><a name="suggestedPartitioning-pa9"></a>Het installatieprogramma kan aanbieden de ongebruikte ruimte van een + Windows-partitie te gebruiken. Dit kan een nuttige manier zijn om ruimte te + maken voor uw nieuwe Mageia-installatie, maar zie de waarschuwing hieronder. </p> - <p>With this option, the installer displays the remaining Windows partition in - light blue and the proposed Mageia partition in dark blue with their - intended sizes just underneath. You have the option to modify these sizes by - clicking and dragging the gap between both partitions. See the following - screenshot: - </p> - - </li> - <li class="listitem"> - - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa12"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Erase and use Entire Disk</strong></span></p> - - - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa13"></a>This option will allocate the entire drive for Mageia + <p>Bij deze optie is de resterende Windowspartitie lichtblauw en de nieuwe + Mageiapartitie donkerblauw. Eronder ziet u hun voorgestelde groottes. U kunt + die wijzigen door op de spleet tussen deze partities te klikken, en naar + links of rechts te slepen. Zie de volgende schermafbeelding </p> @@ -127,9 +122,9 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa14"></a>This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care! If you - intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already have data - on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use this option. + <p>Dit houdt in dat de Windows-partitie verkleind wordt en is daarom een + riskante bewerking, dus zorg eerst dat u van al uw belangrijke bestanden een + reservekopie heeft. </p> </td> @@ -147,13 +142,11 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa11"></a>Merk op dat de Windows partitie hiervoor kleiner gemaakt moet worden, wat - niet zonder enig risico is. De partitie moet "schoon" zijn, wat inhoudt dat - Windows correct afgesloten moet zijn toen het voor het laatst gebruikt werd - en dat het gedefragmenteerd moet zijn. Dit is echter geen garantie dat alle - bestanden op de partitie uit het gebied gehaald zijn dat op het punt staat - gebruikt te worden. Het wordt sterk aanbevolen om vooraf een kopie van uw - persoonlijke bestanden te maken op een andere schijf of lokatie. + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa11"></a>De partitie moet "schoon" zijn, wat inhoudt dat Windows correct afgesloten + moet zijn toen het voor het laatst gebruikt werd en dat het gedefragmenteerd + moet zijn. Dit is echter geen garantie dat alle bestanden op de partitie uit + het gebied gehaald zijn dat op het punt staat gebruikt te worden voor + Mageia. </p> </td> @@ -164,7 +157,37 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa16"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Custom Disk Partitioning</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa12"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Wissen en gebruik de hele schijf</strong></span></p> + + + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa13"></a>Deze optie zal de volledige schijf toewijzen aan Mageia + </p> + + + <div class="warning" title="Waarschuwing" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> + <table border="0" summary="Warning"> + <tr> + <td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Waarschuwing]" src="warning.png"></td> + <th align="left"></th> + </tr> + <tr> + <td align="left" valign="top"> + + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa14"></a>Dit zal ALLE gegevens op het geselecteerde harde schijf verwijderen. Pas + op! Gebruik deze optie niet als u van plan bent om een deel van de schijf + voor iets anders te gebruiken, of als u er gegevens op hebt staan die u niet + wilt verliezen. + </p> + + </td> + </tr> + </table> + </div> + + </li> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa16"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Aangepaste schijfpartitionering</strong></span></p> <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa17"></a>Hiermee krijgt u volledige controle over het plaatsen van de installatie op @@ -176,11 +199,9 @@ </div> - - - <p>If you are not using the <span class="emphasis"><em>Custom disk partitioning</em></span> - option, then the installer will allocate the available space according to - the following rules: + <p>Als u geen <span class="emphasis"><em>Aangepaste schijfpartitionering</em></span> gebruikt, + dan zal het installatieprogramma de beschikbare ruimte volgens de volgende + regels verdelen: </p> @@ -188,36 +209,35 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>If the total available space is less than 50 GB, then only one partition is - created. This will be the <code class="filename">/</code> (root) partition. + <p>Als de totaal beschikbare ruimte kleiner is dan 50 GB, dan wordt slechts één + partitie aangemaakt. Dit zal de <code class="filename">/</code>(root)-partitie zijn. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>If the total available space is greater than 50 GB, then three partitions - are created - </p> + <p>Als er meer dan 50 GB beschikbaar is, dan worden drie partities aangemaakt</p> <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>6/19 of the total available place is allocated to <code class="filename">/</code> - with a maximum of 50 GB + <p>6/19e van de beschikbare ruimte gaat naar <code class="filename">/</code>, tot een + maximum van 50 GB </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>1/19 is allocated to <code class="filename">swap</code> with a maximum of 4 GB + <p>1/19e gaat naar de <code class="filename">swap</code>-partitie, tot een maximum van 4 + GB </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>the rest (at least 12/19) is allocated to <code class="filename">/home</code></p> + <p>de rest (minimaal 12/19e) gaat naar <code class="filename">/home</code></p> </li> </ul> @@ -228,8 +248,8 @@ </div> - <p>This means that from 160 GB or greater available space, the installer will - create three partitions: + <p>Dat betekent dat vanaf 160 GB aan beschikbare ruimte de volgende drie + partities gemaakt worden: </p> @@ -237,17 +257,17 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>50 GB for <code class="filename">/</code></p> + <p>50 GB voor <code class="filename">/</code></p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>4 GB for <code class="filename">swap</code></p> + <p>4 GB voor <code class="filename">swap</code></p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>and the remainder for <code class="filename">/home</code></p> + <p>en de rest voor <code class="filename">/home</code></p> </li> </ul> @@ -263,24 +283,25 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p>If you are using a UEFI system, the ESP (EFI System Partition) will be - automatically detected - or created if it does not exist yet - and mounted - on <code class="filename">/boot/EFI</code>. The <span class="emphasis"><em>Custom disk - partitioning</em></span> option is the only one that allows to check it has - been correctly done. + <p>Als u een UEFI-systeem gebruikt, zal het ESP (EFI-systeempartitie) + automatisch gevonden worden, of aangemaakt worden als die nog niet bestaat, + en gekoppeld worden aan <code class="filename">/boot/EFI</code>. De optie + <span class="emphasis"><em>Aangepaste schijfpartitionering</em></span> is de enige waarmee kan + worden gecontroleerd of dit correct gedaan is. </p> - <p>If you are using a Legacy (also known as BIOS) system with a GPT partitioned - disk, you need to create a BIOS boot partition if it doesn't already - exist. It should be about 1 MiB with no mount point. It can be created with - the Installer, under <span class="emphasis"><em>Custom disk partitioning</em></span>, like any - other partition. Be sure to select <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">BIOS boot partition</span>”</span> for - filesystem type. + <p>Als u gebruik maakt van een Legacysysteem (ook bekend als CSM- of + BIOSsysteem) met een GPT-schijf, dan moet u een BIOS-opstart-partitie + aanmaken als die nog niet bestaat. Deze partitie is ongeveer 1 MiB groot en + heeft geen koppelpunt. Het kan met het installatieprogramma gemaakt worden, + in <span class="emphasis"><em>Aangepaste schijfpartitionering</em></span>, zoals elke andere + partitie. Selecteer wel <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">BIOS-opstart-partitie</span>”</span> als + bestandssysteemtype. </p> - <p>See <a class="xref" href="diskPartitioning.html#diskdrake" title="Custom Disk Partitioning with DiskDrake">DiskDrake</a> for information on how to proceed. + <p>Zie <a class="xref" href="diskPartitioning.html#diskdrake" title="Aangepaste schijfpartitionering met DiskDrake">DiskDrake</a> voor informatie over hoe verder te gaan. </p> </td> @@ -302,17 +323,17 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p>Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the - previous standard of 512. Due to lack of available hardware, the - partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested with such a - drive. + <p>Sommige nieuwere gegevensdragers hebben nu logische sectoren van 4096 bytes, + in plaats van de gebruikelijke 512 bytes. Door een gebrek aan beschikbare + hardware is de partitioneringstool die tijdens het installeren gebruikt + wordt, niet getest met zo'n opslagmedium. </p> - <p>Some SSD devices now use an erase block size over 1 MB. If you have such a - device we suggest that you partition the drive in advance, using an - alternative partitioning tool like gparted, and to use the following - settings: + <p>Sommige SSD's hebben een wisblok-grootte van meer dan 1 MB. Als u zo'n + gegevensdrager heeft, bevelen we aan deze vooraf met een alternatief + werktuig, bijvoorbeeld gparted, te partitioneren en de volgende instellingen + te gebruiken: </p> @@ -320,13 +341,13 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Align to</em></span> = MiB + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Uitlijnen op</em></span> = MiB </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Free space preceding (MiB)</em></span> = 2 + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Vrije ruimte links (MiB)</em></span> = 2 </p> </li> @@ -334,7 +355,9 @@ </div> - <p>Also make sure all partitions are created using an even number of megabytes.</p> + <p>Vergewis u er ook van dat alle partities gecreëerd worden met een even + aantal megabytes. + </p> </td> </tr> @@ -447,9 +470,10 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p>If you are not sure what to choose, click <span class="emphasis"><em>Previous</em></span> to - go back and then tick <span class="emphasis"><em>Custom disk partitioning</em></span>, where - you can click on a partition to see its type and size. + <p>Als u niet zeker bent van uw keuze, klik dan op <span class="emphasis"><em>Vorige</em></span> + om terug te keren en dan op <span class="emphasis"><em>Aangepaste + schijfpartitionering</em></span>, waar u op een partitie kunt klikken om haar + type en grootte te zien. </p> </td> @@ -496,16 +520,15 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="takeOverHdConfirm-pa1"></a>Click on <span class="emphasis"><em>Previous</em></span> if you are at all unsure about your - choice. + <p><a name="takeOverHdConfirm-pa1"></a>Klik op <span class="emphasis"><em>Vorige</em></span> als u niet echt zeker bent van uw keuze. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="takeOverHdConfirm-pa2"></a>Click on <span class="emphasis"><em>Next</em></span> to proceed if you are sure that it is OK - to erase <span class="bold"><strong>every</strong></span> partition, <span class="bold"><strong>every</strong></span> operating system and <span class="bold"><strong>all - data</strong></span> that might be on that hard disk. + <p><a name="takeOverHdConfirm-pa2"></a>Klik op <span class="emphasis"><em>Volgende</em></span> om verder te gaan als u zeker bent dat + het prima is om <span class="bold"><strong>elke</strong></span> partitie, <span class="bold"><strong>elk</strong></span> besturingssysteem en <span class="bold"><strong>alle + gegevens</strong></span> te wissen die op die harde schijf kunnen staan. </p> </li> @@ -515,11 +538,11 @@ </div> - <div lang="nl" class="section" title="Custom Disk Partitioning with DiskDrake"> + <div lang="nl" class="section" title="Aangepaste schijfpartitionering met DiskDrake"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="diskdrake"></a>Custom Disk Partitioning with DiskDrake + <h3 class="title"><a name="diskdrake"></a>Aangepaste schijfpartitionering met DiskDrake </h3> </div> </div> @@ -531,8 +554,10 @@ - - + + + + @@ -543,33 +568,33 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="diskdrake-pa3"></a>Modify the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions, - change the filesystem or size of a partition and even view their details - before you start. + <p><a name="diskdrake-pa3"></a>Pas hier de partitionering van uw harde schijf of schijven aan. U kunt + partities verwijderen of aanmaken, het bestandssysteem of de grootte van een + partitie wijzigen en zelfs bekijken wat ze bevatten voor u start. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="diskdrake-pa4"></a>There is a tab at the top for every detected hard disk (or other storage - device, like a USB key). In the screenshot above there are two available - devices: <code class="filename">sda </code>and <code class="filename">sdb</code>. + <p><a name="diskdrake-pa4"></a>Bovenaan is er een tabblad voor elke gevonden harde schijf (of ander + opslagmedium, zoals een usb-stick), bijvoorbeeld: <code class="filename">sda</code>, + <code class="filename">sdb</code>, <code class="filename">sdc</code>, enz. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="diskdrake-pa6"></a>For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, - or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe - it. <span class="emphasis"><em>Expert mode</em></span> provides more options such as to label - (name) a partition, or to choose a partition type. + <p><a name="diskdrake-pa6"></a>Voor alle andere acties: Klik eerst op de gewenste partitie. Bekijk die + vervolgens of kies een bestandssysteem en een koppelpunt, pas de grootte aan + of verwijder haar. <span class="emphasis"><em>Expert-modus</em></span>geeft meer opties, zoals + een partitie een label (naam) geven of een partitietype kiezen. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="diskdrake-pa6a"></a>Continue until you have adjusted everything to your satisfaction, then click - <span class="emphasis"><em>Done</em></span> when you're ready. + <p><a name="diskdrake-pa6a"></a>Ga verder totdat alles naar uw wensen is aangepast, klik vervolgens op + <span class="emphasis"><em>Klaar</em></span>. </p> </li> @@ -590,17 +615,18 @@ <ol class="orderedlist" type="1"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="diskdrake-pa5"></a>Take care with the <span class="emphasis"><em>Clear all</em></span> option, use it only if you - are sure you want to wipe all partitions on the selected storage device. + <p><a name="diskdrake-pa5"></a>Wees voorzichtig met de <span class="guibutton">Alles wissen</span>-knop, gebruik + deze enkel als u zeker bent dat u alle partities op het geselecteerde + opslagapparaat wilt verwijderen. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="diskdrake-pa1"></a>If you wish to use encryption on your <code class="filename">/</code> partition you - must ensure that you have a separate <code class="filename">/boot</code> - partition. The encryption option for the <code class="filename">/boot</code> - partition must NOT be set, otherwise your system will be unbootable. + <p><a name="diskdrake-pa1"></a>Als u uw <code class="filename">/</code>-partitie wilt versleutelen, verzeker u er + dan van dat u een aparte <code class="filename">/boot</code>-partitie heeft. De + <code class="filename">/boot</code>-partitie mag NIET versleuteld worden, anders kunt + u uw systeem niet opstarten. </p> </li> @@ -626,16 +652,17 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>If you are installing Mageia on a UEFI system, check that an ESP (EFI System - Partition) is present and correctly mounted on - <code class="filename">/boot/EFI</code>. See Figure 1 below. + <p>Als u Mageia op een UEFI-systeem installeert, zorg dan dat een ESP + (EFI-Systeem-Partitie) beschikbaar is en correct is aangekoppeld op + <code class="filename">/boot/EFI</code>. Zie Figuur 1 hieronder. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>If you are installing Mageia on a Legacy/GPT system, check that a BIOS boot - partition is present and of the correct type. See Figure 2 below. + <p>Als u Mageia op een Legacy/GPT-systeem installeert, zorg dan dat een + BIOS-opstart-partitie beschikbaar is en daarnaast ook van het juiste type + is. Zie Figuur 2 hieronder. </p> </li> @@ -678,17 +705,18 @@ - <p><a name="formatPartitions-pa1"></a>Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on - partitions <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> marked for formatting will be preserved. + <p><a name="formatPartitions-pa1"></a>Hier kunt u kiezen welke partitie(s) u wilt formatteren. Gegevens op + partities die <span class="emphasis"><em>niet</em></span> aangevinkt zijn, blijven bewaard. </p> - <p><a name="formatPartitions-pa2"></a>Usually, at least the partitions that DrakX selected need to be formatted. + <p><a name="formatPartitions-pa2"></a>Gewoonlijk moeten op zijn minst de partities die DrakX koos, geformatteerd + worden. </p> - <p><a name="formatPartitions-pa3"></a>Click on <span class="emphasis"><em>Advanced</em></span> to choose the partitions you want to - check for so-called <span class="emphasis"><em>bad blocks</em></span></p> + <p><a name="formatPartitions-pa3"></a>Klik op <span class="emphasis"><em>Geavanceerd</em></span> om de partities te kiezen die u + wilt controleren op zogenoemde <span class="emphasis"><em>slechte blokken</em></span></p> <div class="tip" title="Tip" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> @@ -700,10 +728,10 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p><a name="formatPartitions-pa4"></a>If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on - <span class="emphasis"><em>Previous</em></span>, again on <span class="emphasis"><em>Previous</em></span> and - then on <span class="emphasis"><em>Custom</em></span> to get back to the main screen, where - you can choose to view details of your partitions. + <p><a name="formatPartitions-pa4"></a>Als u niet zeker bent dat u de juiste keuze gemaakt heeft, kunt u op + <span class="emphasis"><em>Vorige</em></span> klikken, nogmaals op <span class="emphasis"><em>Vorige</em></span> + en dan op <span class="emphasis"><em>Aangepaste schijfpartitionering</em></span> om in het + scherm te komen waar u kunt kiezen om details van uw partities te zien. </p> </td> @@ -712,8 +740,8 @@ </div> - <p><a name="formatPartitions-pa5"></a>When you are confident about the selections, click on - <span class="emphasis"><em>Next</em></span> to continue. + <p><a name="formatPartitions-pa5"></a>Klik op <span class="emphasis"><em>Volgende</em></span> om door te gaan als u zeker bent van + uw keus. </p> </div> diff --git a/nl/exitInstall.html b/nl/exitInstall.html index e6b34f1..cbe3e10 100644 --- a/nl/exitInstall.html +++ b/nl/exitInstall.html @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ <meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"> <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Installeren met DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Installeren met DrakX"> - <link rel="prev" href="installUpdates.html" title="Updates"> + <link rel="prev" href="installUpdates.html" title="Herzieningen"> <link rel="next" href="uninstall-Mageia.html" title="Mageia deïnstalleren"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> <!-- body { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } @@ -33,13 +33,13 @@ - <p><a name="exitInstall-pa1"></a>You have finished installing and configuring Mageia and it is now safe to - remove the installation medium and reboot your computer. + <p><a name="exitInstall-pa1"></a>U bent klaar met het installeren en configureren van Mageia en u kunt nu met + een gerust hart het installatiemedium verwijderen en uw computer herstarten. </p> - <p><a name="exitInstall-pa2"></a>After rebooting, you can use the bootloader screen to choose which operating - system to start (if there are more than one on your computer). + <p><a name="exitInstall-pa2"></a>Tijdens het opstarten kunt u in het opstartladerscherm kiezen tussen de + besturingssystemen op uw computer (als u er meer dan één heeft). </p> @@ -52,8 +52,8 @@ </p> - <p><a name="exitInstall-pa5"></a>Visit <a class="ulink" href="http://www.mageia.org/en/" target="_top">www.mageia.org/en/</a> - if you have any questions or want to contribute to Mageia + <p><a name="exitInstall-pa5"></a>Bezoek <a class="ulink" href="http://www.mageia.org/en/" target="_top">www.mageia.org/nl/</a> + als u vragen heeft of als u wilt bijdragen aan Mageia </p> </div> diff --git a/nl/firewall.html b/nl/firewall.html index 6706830..2898976 100644 --- a/nl/firewall.html +++ b/nl/firewall.html @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Installeren met DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Installeren met DrakX"> <link rel="prev" href="securityLevel.html" title="Beveiligingsniveau"> - <link rel="next" href="installUpdates.html" title="Updates"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> + <link rel="next" href="installUpdates.html" title="Herzieningen"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> <!-- body { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } table { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } diff --git a/nl/graphicalConfiguration.html b/nl/graphicalConfiguration.html index b37a6f2..9288e4c 100644 --- a/nl/graphicalConfiguration.html +++ b/nl/graphicalConfiguration.html @@ -2,22 +2,22 @@ <head> <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8"> - <title>Graphical Configuration</title> + <title>Grafische configuratie</title> <meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"> <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Installeren met DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Installeren met DrakX"> <link rel="prev" href="addUser.html" title="Gebruikersbeheer"> - <link rel="next" href="setupBootloader.html" title="Bootloader"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> + <link rel="next" href="setupBootloader.html" title="Opstartlader"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> <!-- body { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } table { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } --></style></head> <body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"> - <div lang="nl" class="section" title="Graphical Configuration"> + <div lang="nl" class="section" title="Grafische configuratie"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h2 class="title"><a name="graphicalConfiguration"></a>Graphical Configuration + <h2 class="title"><a name="graphicalConfiguration"></a>Grafische configuratie </h2> </div> </div> @@ -51,17 +51,19 @@ - <p><a name="configureX_chooser-pa1"></a>No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) - you chose for this install of Mageia, they are all based on a graphical user - interface system called <code class="literal">X Window System</code>, or simply - <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">X</span>”</span>. So in order for KDE Plasma, GNOME, LXDE or any other - graphical environment to work well, the following <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">X</span>”</span> settings - need to be correct. + + + <p><a name="configureX_chooser-pa1"></a>Welke grafische omgeving (ook bekend als werkomgeving) u ook koos voor deze + installatie van Mageia, zij is gebaseerd op een grafisch + gebuikersinterfacesysteem met de naam <code class="literal">X-Windows</code>, of + eenvoudig <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">X</span>”</span>. Om KDE, Gnome, LXDE of welke andere grafische + omgeving dan ook goed te laten werken, moeten de volgende instellingen van + <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">X</span>”</span> juist zijn. </p> - <p>Choose the appropriate settings manually if you think the details are - incorrect, or if none are shown. + <p>Kies handmatig de passende instellingen als u denkt dat de details fout + zijn, of als er geen weergegeven worden. </p> @@ -69,11 +71,11 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="configureX_chooser-pa2"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Graphic Card</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="configureX_chooser-pa2"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Grafische kaart</strong></span></p> - <p>If you need to, you can select a specific card from this expandable - list. See <a class="xref" href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_card_list" title="Kies een X-server (Configureer uw grafische kaart)">de paragraaf “Kies een X-server (Configureer uw grafische kaart)”</a>. + <p>Indien nodig kunt u een specifieke kaart selecteren in deze uitklapbare + lijst. Zie <a class="xref" href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_card_list" title="Kies een X-server (Configureer uw grafische kaart)">Kies een X-server (Configureer uw grafische kaart)</a>. </p> </li> @@ -82,19 +84,20 @@ <p><a name="configureX_chooser-pa3"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Monitor</strong></span></p> - <p>You can choose Plug 'n Play, if applicable, or choose your monitor from the - <span class="emphasis"><em>Vendor</em></span> or <span class="emphasis"><em>Generic</em></span> lists. Choose - <span class="emphasis"><em>Custom</em></span> if you prefer to manually set the horizontal and - vertical refresh rates of your monitor. See <a class="xref" href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_monitor" title="Beeldscherm (Selecteer een monitor)">de paragraaf “Beeldscherm (Selecteer een monitor)”</a>. + <p>Indien van toepassing kunt u Plug'n Play kiezen, selecteer anders uw monitor + in de <span class="emphasis"><em>Fabrikant</em></span>- of + <span class="emphasis"><em>Algemeen</em></span>-lijst. Neem <span class="emphasis"><em>Aangepast</em></span> als + u liever zelf de horizontale en verticale verversingsfrequenties van uw + beeldscherm kiest. Zie <a class="xref" href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_monitor" title="Beeldscherm (Selecteer een monitor)">Beeldscherm (Selecteer een monitor)</a>. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="configureX_chooser-pa4"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Resolution</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="configureX_chooser-pa4"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Resolutie</strong></span></p> - <p>The resolution and color depth of your monitor can be set here.</p> + <p>De resolutie en kleurdiepte van uw monitor kunt u hier instellen.</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -102,22 +105,22 @@ <p><a name="configureX_chooser-pa5"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Test</strong></span></p> - <p>The test button does not always appear during install. If the option is - there, and you test your settings, you should be asked to confirm that your - settings are correct. If you answer <span class="emphasis"><em>Yes</em></span>, the settings - will be kept. If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration - screen and be able to reconfigure everything until the test result is - satisfactory. If the test option is not available, then make sure your - settings are on the safe side. + <p>De testknop verschijnt niet altijd bij het installeren. Als de knop er is en + u uw instellingen test, zou u de vraag moeten zien of uw instellingen + correct zijn. Als u <span class="emphasis"><em>Ja</em></span> antwoordt, worden de + instellingen bewaard. Als u niets ziet, keert u terug naar het + configuratiescherm en kunt u alles opnieuw instellen totdat de test goed + is. Zorg dat uw instellingen aan de veilige kant zijn als de testknop niet + aanwezig is. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="configureX_chooser-pa6"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Options</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="configureX_chooser-pa6"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Opties</strong></span></p> - <p>Here you can choose to enable or disable various options.</p> + <p>Hier kunt u ervoor kiezen om verschillende opties in of uit te schakelen.</p> </li> </ul> @@ -133,10 +136,11 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p><a name="configureX_chooser-pa3a"></a>There is a risk of damaging a monitor if you choose refresh rates that are - outside the frequency range of that monitor. This applies to older CRT - displays: modern monitors will reject an unsupported frequency and normally - enter standby mode. + <p><a name="configureX_chooser-pa3a"></a>U loopt het risico een beeldscherm te beschadigen als u + verversingsfrequenties kiest die buiten het frequentiebereik van dat scherm + vallen. Dit geldt voor oudere CRT-schermen, moderne beeldschermen zullen een + niet-ondersteunde frequentie weigeren en gewoonlijk naar stand-by-modus + gaan. </p> </td> @@ -175,6 +179,8 @@ + + <p>DrakX heeft een veelomvattende gegevensbank van videokaarten en zal uw grafische kaart gewoonlijk juist identificeren. </p> @@ -187,29 +193,29 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Vendor</p> + <p>Fabrikant</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>then the make of your card</p> + <p>dan het merk van uw kaart</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>and the model of card</p> + <p>en het model van de kaart</p> </li> </ul> </div> - <p>If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in - the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the - <span class="emphasis"><em>Xorg</em></span> category, which provides more than 40 generic and - open source video card drivers. If you still can't find a specific driver - for your card there is the option of using the VESA driver which provides - basic capabilities. + <p>Als u uw kaart niet in de fabrikantenlijst kunt vinden (omdat die nog niet + in de databank zit of ouder is) vindt u mogelijk een geschikt stuurprogramma + in de <span class="emphasis"><em>Xorg</em></span>-categorie, welke meer dan 40 algemene + opensource-stuurprogramma's voor videokaarten biedt. Als u nog steeds geen + stuurprogramma met de naam van uw kaart kunt vinden, kunt u nog het + VESA-stuurprogramma gebruiken dat elementaire mogelijkheden biedt. </p> @@ -222,8 +228,8 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p>Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access - to the <span class="emphasis"><em>Command Line Interface</em></span></p> + <p>Let wel: als u een ongeschikt stuurprogramma kiest, heeft u enkel toegang + tot de <span class="emphasis"><em>Opdrachtregel-interface</em></span></p> </td> </tr> @@ -231,12 +237,12 @@ </div> - <p>Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which - may only be available in the <span class="emphasis"><em>Nonfree</em></span> repository and in - some cases only from the card manufacturers' websites. The - <span class="emphasis"><em>Nonfree</em></span> repository needs to be explicitly enabled to - access them. If you didn't enable it previously, you should do this after - your first reboot. + <p>Sommige videokaartproducenten leveren fabrikantseigen stuurprogramma's voor + Linux die enkel in de <span class="emphasis"><em>Nonfree</em></span>-pakkettendepots + beschikbaar zijn en in sommige gevallen uitsluitend op de website van de + betreffende fabrikant. De <span class="emphasis"><em>Nonfree</em></span>-installatiebronnen + dienen beslist ingeschakeld te zijn om er toegang toe te krijgen. Schakel ze + na de eerste herstart in als u dat niet eerder deed. </p> </div> @@ -266,7 +272,11 @@ - <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa1"></a>DrakX heeft een uitgebreid gegevensbestand met monitors en zal de uwe + + + + + <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa1"></a>DrakX heeft een uitgebreid gegevensbestand met monitoren en zal de uwe gewoonlijk correct identificeren. </p> @@ -280,10 +290,10 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa1w"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Selecting a monitor with different characteristics - could damage your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something - without knowing what you are doing.</strong></span> If in doubt you should - consult your monitor documentation. + <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa1w"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Door een monitor met verkeerde kenmerken te + selecteren, zou u uw beeldscherm kunnen beschadigen. Probeer a.u.b. niets + zonder te weten wat u doet.</strong></span> Raadpleeg bij twijfel de handleiding + van uw monitor. </p> </td> @@ -296,13 +306,13 @@ <div class="variablelist"> <dl> - <dt><span class="term"><a name="configureX_monitor-pa2"></a>Custom</span></dt> + <dt><span class="term"><a name="configureX_monitor-pa2"></a>Aangepast</span></dt> <dd> - <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa3"></a>This option allows you to set two critical parameters: the vertical refresh - rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the - screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are - displayed. + <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa3"></a>Met deze optie kunt u twee cruciale parameters instellen, de horizontale en + vertikale verversingsfrequentie. De horizontale is de snelheid waarmee de + beeldlijnen worden geschreven, de verticale is de snelheid waarmee het hele + beeld wordt ververst. </p> @@ -316,16 +326,16 @@ <dt><span class="term"><a name="configureX_monitor-pa5"></a>Plug'n Play</span></dt> <dd> - <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa6"></a>This is the default option and automatically tries to determine the monitor - type from the monitor database. + <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa6"></a>Dit is de standaard optie, waarbij het beeldscherm automatisch de gegevens + levert die uw computer nodig heeft om het goed te configureren. </p> </dd> - <dt><span class="term"><a name="configureX_monitor-pa7"></a>Vendor</span></dt> + <dt><span class="term"><a name="configureX_monitor-pa7"></a>Fabrikant</span></dt> <dd> - <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa8"></a>Als DrakX uw beeldscherm niet goed herkent en u weet welke monitor u heeft, - kunt u deze als volgt in de boomstructuur kiezen: + <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa8"></a>Als het installatieprogramma uw beeldscherm niet correct gedetecteerd heeft + en u weet welk u heeft, kunt u dit via de volgende opties kiezen: </p> </dd> @@ -337,12 +347,12 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Manufacturer</p> + <p>Fabrikant</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Monitor model</p> + <p>Monitor-model</p> </li> </ul> @@ -351,14 +361,14 @@ <div class="variablelist"> <dl> - <dt><span class="term"><a name="configureX_monitor-pa9"></a>Generic</span></dt> + <dt><span class="term"><a name="configureX_monitor-pa9"></a>Algemeen</span></dt> <dd> - <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa10"></a>Selecting this group will list nearly 30 display configurations such as - 1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes flat-panel displays as used in laptops. This is - often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the VESA card driver - when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it - may be wise to be conservative in your selections. + <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa10"></a>In deze groep kunt u kiezen uit bijna 30 monitorconfiguraties, zoals + 1024x768 @ 60Hz, maar ook voor platte schermen die bijvoorbeeld in laptops + zitten. Dit is vaak een goede groep om van te kiezen als u het + VESA-stuurprogramma moet gebruiken omdat uw videokaart niet goed herkend + wordt. Ook hier is het verstandig terughoudend te zijn met uw keuzes. </p> </dd> diff --git a/nl/index.html b/nl/index.html index ca48024..80d06f7 100644 --- a/nl/index.html +++ b/nl/index.html @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ <dd> <dl> <dt><span class="section"><a href="installer.html#d5e261">De Installatiestappen</a></span></dt> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="installer.html#d5e283">Allereerste installatiewelkomsscherm</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="installer.html#d5e283">Installatiewelkomscherm</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="installer.html#d5e332">Installatieproblemen en mogelijke oplossingen</a></span></dt> </dl> </dd> @@ -54,17 +54,17 @@ <dt><span class="section"><a href="diskPartitioning.html">Partitioning</a></span></dt> <dd> <dl> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="diskPartitioning.html#doPartitionDisks">Suggested Partitioning</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="diskPartitioning.html#doPartitionDisks">Voorgestelde partitionering</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="diskPartitioning.html#ask_mntpoint_s">Kies de koppelpunten</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="diskPartitioning.html#takeOverHdConfirm">Bevestig het formatteren van de harde schijf</a></span></dt> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="diskPartitioning.html#diskdrake">Custom Disk Partitioning with DiskDrake</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="diskPartitioning.html#diskdrake">Aangepaste schijfpartitionering met DiskDrake</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="diskPartitioning.html#formatPartitions">Formatteren</a></span></dt> </dl> </dd> <dt><span class="section"><a href="software.html">Software</a></span></dt> <dd> <dl> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="software.html#d5e703">Media Selection</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="software.html#d5e705">Mediaselectie</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="software.html#chooseDesktop">Werkomgevingselectie</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="software.html#choosePackageGroups">Pakketgroepselectie</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="software.html#minimal-install">Minimale installatie</a></span></dt> @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ <dt><span class="section"><a href="addUser.html#addUserAdvanced">Gebruikersbeheer (geavanceerd)</a></span></dt> </dl> </dd> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="graphicalConfiguration.html">Graphical Configuration</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="graphicalConfiguration.html">Grafische configuratie</a></span></dt> <dd> <dl> <dt><span class="section"><a href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_chooser">Configuratie van grafische kaart en monitor</a></span></dt> @@ -87,15 +87,15 @@ <dt><span class="section"><a href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_monitor">Beeldscherm (Selecteer een monitor)</a></span></dt> </dl> </dd> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html">Bootloader</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html">Opstartlader</a></span></dt> <dd> <dl> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e999">Grub2</a></span></dt> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e1014">Bootloader Setup</a></span></dt> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e1104">Other Options</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e999">Beschikbare opstartladers</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e1028">Opstartlader-instellingen</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e1160">Andere opties</a></span></dt> </dl> </dd> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="misc-params.html">Configuration Summary</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="misc-params.html">Instellingenoverzicht</a></span></dt> <dd> <dl> <dt><span class="section"><a href="misc-params.html#misc-params-system">Systeeminstellingen</a></span></dt> @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ </dd> <dt><span class="section"><a href="securityLevel.html">Beveiligingsniveau</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="firewall.html">Firewall</a></span></dt> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="installUpdates.html">Updates</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="installUpdates.html">Herzieningen</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="exitInstall.html">Gefeliciteerd</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="uninstall-Mageia.html">Mageia deïnstalleren</a></span></dt> </dl> diff --git a/nl/installUpdates.html b/nl/installUpdates.html index a94bf2a..52c20b4 100644 --- a/nl/installUpdates.html +++ b/nl/installUpdates.html @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ <head> <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8"> - <title>Updates</title> + <title>Herzieningen</title> <meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"> <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Installeren met DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Installeren met DrakX"> @@ -13,11 +13,11 @@ table { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } --></style></head> <body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"> - <div lang="nl" class="section" title="Updates"> + <div lang="nl" class="section" title="Herzieningen"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h2 class="title"><a name="installUpdates"></a>Updates + <h2 class="title"><a name="installUpdates"></a>Herzieningen </h2> </div> </div> @@ -30,7 +30,9 @@ + + @@ -39,8 +41,8 @@ - <p><a name="installUpdates-pa1"></a>Since this version of Mageia was released, some packages will have been - updated or improved. + <p><a name="installUpdates-pa1"></a>Sinds deze versie van Mageia werd uitgegeven, zullen sommige pakketten + bijgewerkt of verbeterd zijn. </p> @@ -48,20 +50,20 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="installUpdates-pa2"></a>Select <span class="emphasis"><em>Yes</em></span> if you wish to download and install them + <p><a name="installUpdates-pa2"></a>Kies <span class="emphasis"><em>Ja</em></span> als u ze wilt downloaden en installeren </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Select <span class="emphasis"><em>No</em></span> if you don't want to do this now, or if you - aren't connected to the Internet + <p>Kies <span class="emphasis"><em>Nee</em></span> als u dat niet nu wilt doen, of als u nu niet + met internet verbonden bent. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="installUpdates-pa3"></a>Press <span class="emphasis"><em>Next</em></span> to continue + <p><a name="installUpdates-pa3"></a>Klik op <span class="emphasis"><em>Volgende</em></span> om verder te gaan </p> </li> diff --git a/nl/installer.html b/nl/installer.html index 462ffa2..643edc6 100644 --- a/nl/installer.html +++ b/nl/installer.html @@ -45,6 +45,8 @@ + + <p>DrakX is ontworpen om uw installatie of systeemopwaardering zo gemakkelijk mogelijk te maken, ongeacht of GNU-Linux nieuw is voor u of dat u een ervaren gebruiker bent. @@ -67,23 +69,23 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>The install process is divided into a number of steps - the status of which - is indicated in a panel to the left of the screen. + <p>Het installatieproces is verdeeld in een aantal stappen - hun status is + aangegeven in een paneel links op het scherm. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Each step has one or more screens, which may also have - <span class="emphasis"><em>Advanced</em></span> sections with extra, less commonly required - options. + <p>Elke stap bevat één of meer schermen, sommige kunnen een + <span class="emphasis"><em>Geavanceerd</em></span>-knop hebben voor extra, minder + gebruikelijke opties. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Most screens have <span class="emphasis"><em>Help</em></span> buttons for further details - about the particular step. + <p>De meeste schermen hebben een <span class="emphasis"><em>Hulp</em></span>knop voor meer + details over de betreffende stap. </p> </li> @@ -100,17 +102,17 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p>If at some point during the install you decide to abort the installation, it - is possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a - partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your - computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well - leave you with an unusable system. + <p>Als u ergens tijdens de installatie besluit deze af te breken, is het + mogelijk uw pc te herstarten, maar denk goed na voor u dit doet. Zodra een + partitie geformatteerd is of herzieningen geïnstalleerd worden, is uw + computer niet meer in dezelfde staat. Herstarten levert dan + hoogstwaarschijnlijk een onbruikbaar systeem op. </p> - <p>If, in spite of this, you are very sure rebooting is what you want, go to a - text terminal by pressing the keys <span class="keycap"><strong>Ctrl</strong></span>+<span class="keycap"><strong>Alt</strong></span>+<span class="keycap"><strong>F2</strong></span> together. After that, - press <span class="keycap"><strong>Ctrl</strong></span>+<span class="keycap"><strong>Alt</strong></span>+<span class="keycap"><strong>Delete</strong></span> together to reboot. + <p>Als u desondanks zeker bent dat u wilt herstarten, ga dan naar een + tekstterminal door tegelijkertijd op <span class="keycap"><strong>Ctrl</strong></span>+<span class="keycap"><strong>Alt</strong></span>+<span class="keycap"><strong>F2</strong></span> te drukken. Druk + vervolgens tegelijkertijd op <span class="keycap"><strong>Ctrl</strong></span>+<span class="keycap"><strong>Alt</strong></span>+<span class="keycap"><strong>Delete</strong></span> om te herstarten. </p> </td> @@ -121,11 +123,11 @@ </div> - <div class="section" title="Allereerste installatiewelkomsscherm"> + <div class="section" title="Installatiewelkomscherm"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e283"></a>Allereerste installatiewelkomsscherm + <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e283"></a>Installatiewelkomscherm </h3> </div> </div> @@ -133,22 +135,22 @@ - <p>The particular screen that you will first see when booting from the - Installation media will depend on whether your computer motherboard is of - the Legacy (BIOS) or UEFI type. + <p>Welk scherm u precies als eerste ziet als u opstart van het + Installatiemedium, hangt af van of u uw computer in Legacy- (BIOS-) of + UEFI-modus startte. </p> - <p>The welcome menu screen has various options, however the default option will - start the installer, and is normally all that you will need. + <p>Het welkomscherm heeft verscheidene opties, de standaard optie zal het + installatieprogramma starten en is gewoonlijk alles dat u nodig heeft. </p> - <div class="section" title="Legacy (BIOS) Systems"> + <div class="section" title="Legacy(BIOS)-systemen"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e287"></a>Legacy (BIOS) Systems + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e287"></a>Legacy(BIOS)-systemen </h4> </div> </div> @@ -163,40 +165,40 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Install Mageia</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Mageia installeren</strong></span></p> - <p>Install Mageia to a hard disk. This is the default option, and will - automatically start after a short while unless another option is selected. + <p>Installeer Mageia op een harde schijf. Dit is de standaard optie en zal na + korte tijd automatisch starten, tenzij een andere optie gekozen wordt. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Rescue System</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Reddingssysteem</strong></span></p> - <p>This option allows you to either re-install the bootloader for an existing - Mageia installation or you can use it to restore a Windows bootloader. + <p>Met deze optie kunt u de opstartlader voor een bestaande Mageia-installatie + herinstalleren, of de Windows-opstartlader herstellen. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Memory Test</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Geheugentest</strong></span></p> - <p>Test the installed RAM by performing multiple read and write - operations. Reboot to end the test. + <p>Test de geïnstalleerde RAM door meerdere lees- en schrijfbewerkingen uit te + voeren. Herstart om de test te beëindigen. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>F2: Language</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong> F2: Taal</strong></span></p> - <p>Press F2 for alternative languages.</p> + <p>Klik op F2 voor andere talen.</p> </li> </ul> @@ -205,11 +207,11 @@ </div> - <div class="section" title="UEFI Systems"> + <div class="section" title="UEFI-systemen"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e310"></a>UEFI Systems + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e310"></a>UEFI-systemen </h4> </div> </div> @@ -217,9 +219,10 @@ - <p>From this screen, you can access options by pressing <span class="keycap"><strong>e</strong></span> to - enter the edit mode. To come back to this screen, press <span class="keycap"><strong>Esc</strong></span> - to quit without saving or press <span class="keycap"><strong>F10</strong></span> to save and quit. + <p>Vanuit dit scherm kunt u voor meer opties naar de bewerkingsmodus door op de + letter <span class="keycap"><strong>e</strong></span> te drukken. Druk op de<span class="keycap"><strong>Esc</strong></span>-toets + om naar dit scherm terug te gaan zonder iets op te slaan of op + <span class="keycap"><strong>F10</strong></span> om terug te gaan en uw veranderingen wel te bewaren. </p> @@ -230,22 +233,22 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Install:</strong></span> Start the Install process + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Installeer:</strong></span> Start het installatieproces </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Rescue:</strong></span> This option allows you to either - re-install the bootloader for an existing Mageia installation or you can use - it to restore a Windows bootloader. + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Redding:</strong></span> Met deze optie kunt u de + opstartlader voor een bestaande Mageia-installatie herinstalleren, of de + Windows-opstartlader herstellen. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>F2: Language:</strong></span> Press <span class="keycap"><strong>F2</strong></span> for - alternative languages. + <p><span class="bold"><strong>F2: Taal:</strong></span> Druk op <span class="keycap"><strong>F2</strong></span> voor + meer talen. </p> </li> @@ -253,8 +256,8 @@ </div> - <p>If you booted from a USB stick, you will see the above options duplicated, - and in this case, you should use the set that will be suffixed with "USB". + <p>Als u van een usb-stick opstartte, zult u bovenstaande opties twee keer + zien, kies in dit geval een optie die eindigt met "USB". </p> </div> @@ -290,22 +293,22 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>After the initial screen you did not progress to the <span class="emphasis"><em>Language - Selection</em></span> screen. This can happen with some graphic cards and - older systems. Try using low resolution by typing <span class="command"><strong>vgalo</strong></span> - at the prompt. + <p>Na het eerste scherm kwam u niet bij het + <span class="emphasis"><em>Taalkeuze</em></span>scherm. Dit kan gebeuren bij sommige + grafische kaarten en oudere systemen. Probeer een lagere resolutie te + gebruiken door <span class="command"><strong>vgalo</strong></span> te typen bij de "boot:"-prompt. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be - possible. In this case it is worth trying a text-mode installation. To use - this press <span class="keycap"><strong>Esc</strong></span> at the <span class="emphasis"><em>Welcome</em></span> screen - and confirm with <span class="keycap"><strong>ENTER</strong></span>. You will be presented with a black - screen with a <code class="prompt">boot:</code> prompt. Type <span class="command"><strong>text</strong></span> - and press <span class="keycap"><strong>ENTER</strong></span> to continue with the installation in text - mode. + <p>Als de hardware erg oud is, kan het zijn dat een grafische installatie niet + mogelijk is. In dit geval is het de moeite waard een tekstmodusinstallatie + te proberen. Klik daartoe op <span class="keycap"><strong>ESC</strong></span> als u bij het + <span class="emphasis"><em>Welkom</em></span>scherm bent en bevestig met + <span class="keycap"><strong>ENTER</strong></span>. U zult een zwart scherm zien met een + <code class="prompt">boot:</code>-prompt. Typ <span class="command"><strong>text</strong></span> en druk op + <span class="keycap"><strong>ENTER</strong></span> om verder te gaan met installeren in tekstmodus. </p> </li> @@ -327,11 +330,11 @@ - <p>If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a - problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic hardware - detection may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type - <span class="command"><strong>noauto</strong></span> at the prompt. This option may also be combined - with other parameters as necessary. + <p>Als het systeem tijdens de installatie blokkeert, kan er een probleem zijn + met de hardwaredetectie. In dit geval kan de automatische detectie van + hardware overgeslagen worden om later te regelen. Type + <span class="command"><strong>noauto</strong></span> bij de prompt om dit te proberen. Deze optie mag + zo nodig met andere gecombineerd worden. </p> </div> @@ -349,11 +352,11 @@ - <p>This will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the - available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the - <code class="literal">mem=<em class="replaceable"><code>xxx</code></em>M</code> parameter, where - <em class="replaceable"><code>xxx</code></em> is the correct amount of - RAM. e.g. <code class="literal">mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM. + <p>Dit zal zelden nodig zijn, maar in sommige gevallen wordt de beschikbare + hoeveelheid RAM onjuist gedetecteerd. U kunt dit handmatig specificeren door + de <code class="literal">mem=<em class="replaceable"><code>xxx</code></em>M</code> parameter te + gebruiken, waarin <em class="replaceable"><code>xxx</code></em> de juiste hoeveelheid RAM + is, bijv. <code class="literal">mem=256M</code> betekent 256MB aan RAM. </p> </div> @@ -371,10 +374,11 @@ - <p>If you converted your hard disk from <code class="literal">Basic</code> format to - <code class="literal">Dynamic</code> format in Microsoft Windows, then it is not - possible to install Mageia on this disc. To revert to a - <code class="literal">Basic</code> disk, see the Microsoft documentation: <a class="ulink" href="http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx" target="_top">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx</a>. + <p>Als u uw harde schijf van <code class="literal">Basic</code>- naar + <code class="literal">Dynamic</code>-formaat geconverteerd heeft in Microsoft Windows, + dan is het onmogelijk Mageia op deze schijf te installeren. Zie de + Microsoft-documentatie om terug te gaan naar een + <code class="literal">Basic</code>schijf: <a class="ulink" href="http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx" target="_top">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx</a>. </p> </div> diff --git a/nl/locale.html b/nl/locale.html index 2bed814..f0403d8 100644 --- a/nl/locale.html +++ b/nl/locale.html @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ <meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"> <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Installeren met DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Installeren met DrakX"> - <link rel="prev" href="misc-params.html" title="Configuration Summary"> + <link rel="prev" href="misc-params.html" title="Instellingenoverzicht"> <link rel="next" href="configureServices.html" title="Configureer uw diensten"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> <!-- body { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } @@ -51,8 +51,8 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="configureTimezoneUTC-pa1"></a>Choose your timezone by choosing your country, or a city close to you in the - same timezone. + <p><a name="configureTimezoneUTC-pa1"></a>Kies uw tijdzone door uw land te kiezen, of een stad die zich dicht bij u in + dezelfde tijdzone bevindt. </p> </li> @@ -60,8 +60,8 @@ </div> - <p><a name="configureTimezoneUTC-pa2"></a>In the next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time - or to GMT, also known as UTC. + <p><a name="configureTimezoneUTC-pa2"></a>In het volgende scherm kunt u kiezen uw hardware clock op lokale tijd in te + stellen of op UTC, ook wel GMT genoemd. </p> @@ -110,16 +110,16 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="selectCountry-pa1"></a>Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, - like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country - can lead to being unable to use a Wireless network. + <p><a name="selectCountry-pa1"></a>Selecteer uw land. Dit is belangrijk voor allerlei instellingen, zoals de + muntsoort en de toegestane draadloze instellingen. Het verkeerde land + instellen kan veroorzaken dat u geen draadloos netwerk kunt gebruiken. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="selectCountry-pa2"></a>If your country isn't in the list, click the <span class="emphasis"><em>Other - Countries</em></span> option and choose your country / region there. + <p><a name="selectCountry-pa2"></a>Als uw land niet in de lijst staat, klik dan op de knop <span class="emphasis"><em>Overige + landen</em></span> en kies uw land daar. </p> </li> @@ -136,9 +136,9 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p><a name="selectCountry-pa3"></a>If your country is only in the <span class="emphasis"><em>Other Countries</em></span> list, - after clicking <span class="emphasis"><em>OK</em></span> it may seem that a country from the - main list was chosen. Despite this, DrakX will actually apply your choice. + <p><a name="selectCountry-pa3"></a>Als uw land alleen in de lijst van <span class="emphasis"><em>Overige landen</em></span> staat + kan het, nadat u op <span class="emphasis"><em>OK</em></span> klikt, lijken alsof een land van + de eerste lijst gekozen is. Desondanks zal DrakX uw keuze toepassen. </p> </td> @@ -159,13 +159,13 @@ - <p><a name="selectCountry-pa4"></a>In the <span class="emphasis"><em>Other Countries</em></span> screen you can also select an - input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input - multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the - default input method, so users should not need to configure it - manually. Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar - functions and can be installed if you added HTTP/FTP media before package - selection. + <p><a name="selectCountry-pa4"></a>In het <span class="emphasis"><em>Overige landen</em></span> scherm kunt u ook een + invoermethode selecteren (onderaan de lijst). Met invoermethodes kunnen + gebruikers meertalige tekens invoeren (Chinees, Japans, Koreaans, + enz.). IBus is de standaard invoermethode, het is dus niet nodig om het + handmatig te configureren. Andere invoermethodes (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, enz.) + hebben soortgelijke functies als IBus en kunnen geïnstalleerd worden als u + HTTP/FTP media toevoegde vóór de pakketgroepselectie. </p> @@ -178,9 +178,10 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p><a name="selectCountry-pa5"></a>If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it - post-install via <span class="guimenu">Configure your Computer</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">System</span>, or by running - <span class="command"><strong>localedrake</strong></span> as <span class="emphasis"><em>root</em></span>. + <p><a name="selectCountry-pa5"></a>Als u het instellen van de invoermethode tijdens het installeren miste, kunt + u dat na de installatie nog doen via <span class="guimenu">Configureer uw + Computer</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Systeem</span>, of door + <span class="command"><strong>localedrake</strong></span> als <span class="emphasis"><em>root</em></span> te starten. </p> </td> diff --git a/nl/misc-params.html b/nl/misc-params.html index 3aa0b97..2dac019 100644 --- a/nl/misc-params.html +++ b/nl/misc-params.html @@ -2,22 +2,22 @@ <head> <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8"> - <title>Configuration Summary</title> + <title>Instellingenoverzicht</title> <meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"> <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Installeren met DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Installeren met DrakX"> - <link rel="prev" href="setupBootloader.html" title="Bootloader"> + <link rel="prev" href="setupBootloader.html" title="Opstartlader"> <link rel="next" href="locale.html" title="Locale"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> <!-- body { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } table { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } --></style></head> <body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"> - <div lang="nl" class="section" title="Configuration Summary"> + <div lang="nl" class="section" title="Instellingenoverzicht"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h2 class="title"><a name="misc-params"></a>Configuration Summary + <h2 class="title"><a name="misc-params"></a>Instellingenoverzicht </h2> </div> </div> @@ -39,10 +39,10 @@ - <p><a name="misc-params-pa1"></a>DrakX presents a proposal for the configuration of your system depending on - the choices you made and on the hardware detected. You can check the - settings here and change them if you want by pressing - <span class="emphasis"><em>Configure</em></span>. + <p><a name="misc-params-pa1"></a>DrakX laat een voorstel zien voor de configuratie van uw systeem, + afhankelijk van de keuzes die u maakte en de apparatuur die DrakX aantrof. U + kunt de instellingen hier controleren en in indien gewenst veranderen door + op <span class="emphasis"><em>Configureren</em></span> te klikken. </p> @@ -55,26 +55,26 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p>As a general rule, it is recommended that you accept the default settings - unless: + <p>Als algemene regel wordt aanbevolen de standaardinstellingen te accepteren, + tenzij: </p> <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Het is bekend dat problemen kunnen optreden als u gebruikt maakt van de - standaardinstelling - </p> + <p>er bekende problemen zijn met een standaardinstelling</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>de standaardinstelling is al geprobeerd en mislukt</p> + <p>de standaardinstelling al geprobeerd is en faalde</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>some other factor mentioned in the detailed sections below is an issue</p> + <p>een andere factor die in de gedetailleerde secties hieronder genoemd wordt, + een probleem is + </p> </li> </ul> @@ -102,33 +102,33 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa2"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Timezone</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa2"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Tijdzone</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa2a"></a>DrakX selects a timezone for you, depending on your preferred language. You - can change it if needed. See also <a class="xref" href="locale.html#configureTimezoneUTC" title="Configureer uw tijdzone">Configure Timezone</a></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa2a"></a>DrakX selecteert een tijdzone op grond van uw voorkeurstaal. U kunt die zo + nodig wijzigen, Zie ook <a class="xref" href="locale.html#configureTimezoneUTC" title="Configureer uw tijdzone">Tijdzone Configureren</a></p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa3"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Country / Region</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa3"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Land/Regio</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa3a"></a>If the selected country is wrong, it is very important that you correct the - setting. See <a class="xref" href="locale.html#selectCountry" title="Selecteer uw land">Select Country</a></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa3a"></a>Als het geselecteerde land fout is, is het erg belangrijk dat u deze + instelling verbetert. Zie <a class="xref" href="locale.html#selectCountry" title="Selecteer uw land">Landkeuze</a></p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa4"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Bootloader</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa4"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Opstartlader</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa4a"></a>DrakX proposal for the bootloader setting + <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa4a"></a>DrakX' voorstel voor de opstartlader-instellingen </p> - <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa4b"></a>Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure GRUB2. For more - information, see <a class="xref" href="setupBootloader.html" title="Bootloader">Bootloader</a></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa4b"></a>Verander niets, tenzij u weet hoe u GRUB2 dient in te stellen. Zie voor meer + informatie <a class="xref" href="setupBootloader.html" title="Opstartlader">Opstartlader</a></p> @@ -136,27 +136,26 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa5"></a><span class="bold"><strong>User management</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa5"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Gebruikersbeheer</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa5a"></a>You can add extra users here. They will each be allocated their own - <code class="filename">/home</code> directories. + <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa5a"></a>Hier kunt u extra gebruikers toevoegen. Ze zullen hun eigen + <code class="filename">/home</code> mappen krijgen. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa6"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Services</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa6"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Diensten</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa6a"></a>System services refer to those small programs which run in the background - (daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain processes. + <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa6a"></a>Systeemdiensten zijn kleine programma's die op de achtergrond draaien + (daemons). Hier kunt u bepaalde daemons activeren of deactiveren. </p> - <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa6b"></a>You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may - prevent your computer from operating correctly. For more information, see - <a class="xref" href="configureServices.html" title="Configureer uw diensten">Configure Services</a></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa6b"></a>Wees voorzichtig voor u iets verandert - een vergissing kan verhinderen dat + uw computer goed werkt. Zie voor meer informatie <a class="xref" href="configureServices.html" title="Configureer uw diensten">Diensten Configureren</a></p> </li> </ul> @@ -181,11 +180,10 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa1"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Keyboard</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa1"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Toetsenbord</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa1a"></a>Configure your keyboard layout according to your location, language and type - of keyboard. + <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa1a"></a>Stel uw toetsenbord in, afhankelijk van uw locatie, taal en toetsenbordtype </p> @@ -210,7 +208,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa2"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Mouse</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa2"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Muis</strong></span></p> <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa2a"></a>Hier kunt u ook andere aanwijsapparaten toevoegen of configureren, zoals @@ -220,27 +218,28 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa3"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Sound card</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa3"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Geluidskaart</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa3a"></a>The installer will use the default driver if one is available. + <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa3a"></a>Het installatieprogramma zal het standaardstuurprogramma kiezen, als dat + beschikbaar is. </p> - <p>If there is no actual default driver for your sound card, there may be other - possible alternative drivers available to choose from. If this is the case, - but you think the installer has not made the most appropriate choice, you - can click on <span class="emphasis"><em>Advanced</em></span> to manually specify a driver. + <p>Als er geen standaard stuurprogramma is voor uw geluidskaart, zijn er + mogelijk andere om uit te kiezen. In dat geval kunt u, als het voorgestelde + stuurprogramma u niet juist lijkt, op <span class="emphasis"><em>Geavanceerd</em></span> + klikken om handmatig een ander te kiezen. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa4"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Graphical interface</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa4"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Grafische interface</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa4a"></a>This section allows you to configure your graphics card(s) and displays. For - more information, see <a class="xref" href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_chooser" title="Configuratie van grafische kaart en monitor">de paragraaf “Configuratie van grafische kaart en monitor”</a></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa4a"></a>Hier kunt u uw grafische kaart(en) en beeldscherm instellen. Zie <a class="xref" href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_chooser" title="Configuratie van grafische kaart en monitor">Configuratie van grafische kaart en monitor</a> voor meer informatie + </p> @@ -270,13 +269,13 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="misc-params-network-pa1"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Network</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-network-pa1"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Netwerk</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="misc-params-network-pa2"></a>You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free - drivers it is better to do that after reboot, using the Mageia Control - Center, if you have not yet enabled the <span class="emphasis"><em>Nonfree</em></span> media - repositories. + <p><a name="misc-params-network-pa2"></a>U kunt uw netwerk hier instellen, maar als u de + <span class="emphasis"><em>Nonfree</em></span>-bronnen nog niet ingeschakeld heeft, kunt u dat + voor netwerkkaarten met fabrikantseigen stuurprogramma's beter achteraf + doen. Dat kan dan in het Mageia-Configuratiecentrum. </p> @@ -289,8 +288,8 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p><a name="misc-params-network-pa3"></a>When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to monitor - that interface as well. + <p><a name="misc-params-network-pa3"></a>Als u een netwerkkaart toevoegt, vergeet dan niet uw firewall zo in te + stellen dat hij deze interface ook bewaakt. </p> </td> @@ -301,17 +300,17 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="misc-params-network-pa4"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Proxies</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-network-pa4"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Proxy's</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="misc-params-network-pa4a"></a>A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider - Internet. This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a - proxy service. + <p><a name="misc-params-network-pa4a"></a>Een Proxy-server werkt als een tussenpersoon tussen uw computer en het + verdere internet. In deze sectie kunt u uw computer zo configureren dat hij + een proxy-service gebruikt. </p> - <p><a name="misc-params-network-pa4b"></a>You may need to consult your systems administrator to obtain the parameters - you need to enter here. + <p><a name="misc-params-network-pa4b"></a>Mogelijk moet u uw systeembeheerder vragen om de instellingen die u hier + moet invullen. </p> </li> @@ -337,12 +336,12 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="misc-params-security-pa1"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Security Level</strong></span></p> + <p><a name="misc-params-security-pa1"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Beveiligingsniveau</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="misc-params-security-pa1a"></a>The Security level for your computer, in most cases the default setting - (Standard) is adequate for general use. Select the option which best suits - your usage. + <p><a name="misc-params-security-pa1a"></a>Het Beveiligingsniveau voor uw computer in, in de meeste gevallen is de + standaardinstelling (Standaard) geschikt voor algemeen gebruik. Selecteer de + optie die het beste bij uw gebruik past. </p> </li> @@ -351,21 +350,22 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-security-pa2"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Firewall</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="misc-params-security-pa2b"></a>The firewall allows you to manage which network connections are allowed on - your computer. The safe and secure default is to allow ZERO inbound - connections. This does not stop you connecting outbound and using your - computer normally. + <p><a name="misc-params-security-pa2b"></a>De firewall laat u regelen welke diensten toegang tot uw systeem mogen + hebben. Standaard staat hij veilig ingesteld op NUL verbindingen naar + binnen. U kunt dan toch verbinding naar buiten maken en uw computer normaal + gebruiken. </p> - <p>Please be aware that the Internet is a high risk network where there are - continuous attempts to probe and attack systems. Even seemingly - <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">safe</span>”</span> connections such as ICMP (for ping) have been used as - covert data channels for exfiltrating data by malicious persons. + <p>Wees u er a.u.b. van bewust dat internet een zeer riskant netwerk is, waar + voortdurende gepoogd wordt om systemen te onderzoeken en aan te + vallen. Zelfs schijnbaar <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">veilige</span>”</span> verbinding zoals ICMP (voor + ping) zijn gebruikt als geheime gegevenskanalen voor het uitfilteren van + gegevens door kwaadwillenden. </p> - <p>For more information, see <a class="xref" href="firewall.html" title="Firewall">Firewall</a>. + <p>Voor meer informatie, zie <a class="xref" href="firewall.html" title="Firewall">Firewall</a>. </p> @@ -378,8 +378,8 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p><a name="misc-params-security-pa2c"></a>Bear in mind that allowing <span class="emphasis"><em>everything</em></span> (no firewall) may - be very risky. + <p><a name="misc-params-security-pa2c"></a>Denk eraan dat <span class="emphasis"><em>alles</em></span> toestaan (geen firewall) erg + riskant kan zijn. </p> </td> diff --git a/nl/selectInstallClass.html b/nl/selectInstallClass.html index d49990e..9dffdd4 100644 --- a/nl/selectInstallClass.html +++ b/nl/selectInstallClass.html @@ -49,23 +49,22 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist" compact> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Install</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Installeren</strong></span></p> - <p>Use this option to perform a fresh installation of Mageia. This will format - the <code class="literal">root</code> partition (<code class="filename">/</code>), but can - preserve a pre-existing <code class="filename">/home</code> partition (a dedicated - /home partition, rather than being incorporated within the root (/) - partition itself). + <p>Gebruik deze optie voor een nieuwe Mageia-installatie. Deze zal de + <code class="literal">root</code>-partitie (<code class="filename">/</code>) formatteren, maar + kan een bestaande <code class="filename">/home</code>-partitie bewaren (als /home op + een eigen partitie staat i.p.v. op de rootpartitie (/)). </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Upgrade</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Opwaarderen</strong></span></p> - <p>Use this option to upgrade an existing installation of Mageia.</p> + <p>Kies dit om een bestaande Mageia-installatie op te waarderen. </p> </li> </ul> @@ -81,12 +80,12 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p>Only upgrading from a previous Mageia version that was <span class="emphasis"><em>still - supported</em></span> when this Installer's version was released, has been - thoroughly tested. If you want to upgrade a Mageia version that has reached - its <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">End Of Life</span>”</span> then it is better to do a - <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">clean</span>”</span> install instead, while preserving your - <code class="filename">/home</code> partition. + <p>Uitsluitend opwaarderen vanaf een eerdere Mageia versie die <span class="emphasis"><em>nog + ondersteund werd</em></span> toen deze versie van het installatieprogramma + werd uitgegeven, is uitgebreid getest. Als u een Mageia-versie wilt + opwaarderen die haar <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Levenseinde</span>”</span> bereikt heeft, dan is het + beter een <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">schone</span>”</span> installatie te doen waarbij u uw + <code class="filename">/home</code>-partitie bewaart. </p> </td> @@ -104,9 +103,10 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p>If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you - can return from the <span class="emphasis"><em>Install or Upgrade</em></span> screen to the - language choice screen by pressing <span class="keycap"><strong>Ctrl</strong></span>+<span class="keycap"><strong>Alt</strong></span>+<span class="keycap"><strong>Home</strong></span>. Do<span class="bold"><strong> NOT</strong></span> do this later in the install. + <p>Als u een extra taal vergat te installeren, kunt u nu nog terug van het + <span class="emphasis"><em>Installeren-of-opwaarderen</em></span>-scherm naar het + taalkeuzescherm door gelijktijdig op de toetsen + <span class="keycap"><strong>Ctrl</strong></span>+<span class="keycap"><strong>Alt</strong></span>+<span class="keycap"><strong>Home</strong></span> te drukken. Doe dit <span class="bold"><strong>NIET</strong></span> later tijdens de installatie. </p> </td> diff --git a/nl/selectKeyboard.html b/nl/selectKeyboard.html index 0cabf20..1fe81d6 100644 --- a/nl/selectKeyboard.html +++ b/nl/selectKeyboard.html @@ -57,8 +57,9 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="selectKeyboard-pa3"></a>If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <span class="emphasis"><em>More</em></span> - to get a fuller list, and select your keyboard there. + <p><a name="selectKeyboard-pa3"></a>Staat uw toetsenbord niet in de lijst die u ziet, klik dan op + <span class="emphasis"><em>Meer</em></span> om een uitgebreidere lijst te krijgen en selecteer + uw toetsenbord daar. </p> @@ -71,11 +72,11 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p><a name="selectKeyboard-pa5"></a>After choosing a keyboard from the <span class="emphasis"><em>More</em></span> dialogue, - you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialogue and it will seem as - though a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this - and continue the installation: the keyboard chosen from the full list will - be applied. + <p><a name="selectKeyboard-pa5"></a>Nadat u een toetsenbord uit het <span class="emphasis"><em>Meer</em></span>-scherm kiest, + keert u terug in het eerste toetsenbordkeuzescherm en zal het lijken alsof + een toetsenbord van dat scherm gekozen werd. U kunt dit met een gerust hart + negeren en doorgaan met de installatie: uw toetsenbordindeling is die welke + u uit de volledige lijst koos. </p> </td> @@ -86,9 +87,9 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="selectKeyboard-pa4"></a>If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an - extra dialogue screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the - Latin and non-Latin keyboard layouts + <p><a name="selectKeyboard-pa4"></a>Als u een toetsenbord kiest dat gebaseerd is op niet-Latijnse lettertekens, + krijgt u een extra scherm waarin u kunt aangeven hoe u wilt wisselen tussen + de Latijnse en niet-Latijnse indeling. </p> </li> diff --git a/nl/selectLanguage.html b/nl/selectLanguage.html index 13c01e6..6d2918e 100644 --- a/nl/selectLanguage.html +++ b/nl/selectLanguage.html @@ -51,18 +51,17 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your - continent. Mageia will use this selection during the installation and for - your installed system. + <p>Kies hier uw voorkeurstaal na eerst de lijst voor uw continent uit te + vouwen. Mageia zal deze selectie gebruiken tijdens het installeren en voor + uw straks geïnstalleerde systeem. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>If it is likely that you (or others) will require several languages to be - installed on your system, then you should use the <span class="emphasis"><em>Multiple - languages</em></span> option to add them now. It will be difficult to add - extra language support after installation. + <p>Als u, voor uzelf (of anderen), meerdere talen op uw systeem nodig heeft, + klik dan op <span class="emphasis"><em>Meerdere talen</em></span> om ze nu toe te voegen. Het + is lastig om achteraf ondersteuning voor extra talen toe te voegen. </p> </li> @@ -81,9 +80,9 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p>Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one as your - preferred language from the main list of languages. It will also be marked - as chosen in the <span class="emphasis"><em>Multiple languages</em></span> screen. + <p>Zelfs als u meer dan één taal kiest, moet één van hen als voorkeurstaal + gekozen worden in het eerste taalscherm. Deze zal ook aangevinkt zijn in het + <span class="emphasis"><em>Meerdere-talen</em></span>-scherm. </p> </td> @@ -96,26 +95,25 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then - it is advisable to install the required language for your keyboard as well + <p>Als u de taal waarvoor uw toetsenbord ontworpen is ook installeert, voorkomt + u verwarring later tijdens de installatie. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the - <span class="emphasis"><em>Multiple languages</em></span> screen if you know that it is - inappropriate for your language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed - languages. + <p>Mageia gebruikt standaard UTF-8- (Unicode)-ondersteuning. Als u weet dat + deze niet geschikt is voor één van uw talen, kan zij uitgeschakeld worden in + het "Meerdere talen" scherm. UTF-8 uitschakelen geldt voor alle + geïnstalleerde talen. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>You can change the language for your system post-installation in the - <span class="guimenu">Mageia Control Center</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">System</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">localization for your - system</span>. - </p> + <p>U kunt de taal van uw systeem na installatie veranderen in het + <span class="guimenu">Mageia-configuratiecentrum</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Systeem</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Taalinstellingen + voor uw systeem beheren</span></p> </li> </ul> diff --git a/nl/selectMouse.html b/nl/selectMouse.html index addd48d..8c3a21b 100644 --- a/nl/selectMouse.html +++ b/nl/selectMouse.html @@ -42,14 +42,14 @@ </p> - <p><a name="selectMouse-pa2"></a>Usually, <span class="guimenu">Universal</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Any PS/2 and - USB mice</span> is a good choice. + <p><a name="selectMouse-pa2"></a>Doorgaans is <span class="guimenu">Universeel</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Iedere + PS/2- en usb-muis</span> een goede keuze. </p> - <p><a name="selectMouse-pa3"></a>Select <span class="guimenu">Universal</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Force - evdev</span> to configure the buttons that do not work - on a mouse with six or more buttons. + <p><a name="selectMouse-pa3"></a>Selecteer <span class="guimenu">Universeel</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Evdev + afdwingen</span> om de niet werkende knoppen te + configureren van een muis met zes of meer knoppen. </p> </div> diff --git a/nl/setupBootloader.html b/nl/setupBootloader.html index 2214132..44f6a87 100644 --- a/nl/setupBootloader.html +++ b/nl/setupBootloader.html @@ -2,22 +2,22 @@ <head> <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8"> - <title>Bootloader</title> + <title>Opstartlader</title> <meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"> <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Installeren met DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Installeren met DrakX"> - <link rel="prev" href="graphicalConfiguration.html" title="Graphical Configuration"> - <link rel="next" href="misc-params.html" title="Configuration Summary"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> + <link rel="prev" href="graphicalConfiguration.html" title="Grafische configuratie"> + <link rel="next" href="misc-params.html" title="Instellingenoverzicht"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> <!-- body { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } table { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } --></style></head> <body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"> - <div lang="nl" class="section" title="Bootloader"> + <div lang="nl" class="section" title="Opstartlader"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h2 class="title"><a name="setupBootloader"></a>Bootloader + <h2 class="title"><a name="setupBootloader"></a>Opstartlader </h2> </div> </div> @@ -27,219 +27,313 @@ - - - - - - - - - - <div class="section" title="Grub2"> + + + + <div class="section" title="Beschikbare opstartladers"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e999"></a>Grub2 + <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e999"></a>Beschikbare opstartladers </h3> </div> </div> </div> - - <div class="itemizedlist" title="Grub2 on Legacy MBR/GPT systems"> - <p class="title"><b>Grub2 on Legacy MBR/GPT systems</b></p> - <ul class="itemizedlist"> - <li class="listitem"> - - <p>GRUB2 (with or without graphical menu) will be used exclusively as the - bootloader for a Legacy/MBR or Legacy/GPT system. - </p> - - </li> - <li class="listitem"> - - <p>By default, a new bootloader will be written into either the MBR (Master - Boot Record) of your first hard drive or in the BIOS boot partition. - </p> - - </li> - </ul> + <div class="section" title="Grub2"> + <div class="titlepage"> + <div> + <div> + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1001"></a>Grub2 + </h4> + </div> + </div> + </div> + + + <div class="itemizedlist"> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Grub2 op verouderde MBR/GPT-systemen</strong></span></p> + <ul class="itemizedlist"> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p>GRUB2 (met of zonder grafische menu) zal uitsluitend gebruikt worden voor + een Legacy/MBR- of Legacy/GPT-systeem + </p> + + </li> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p>Standaard zal een nieuwe opstartlader naar òf de MBR (Master Boot Record) + van uw eerste harde schijf òf de BIOS-opstart-partitie geschreven worden. + </p> + + </li> + </ul> + </div> + + <div class="itemizedlist"> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Grub2-efi op UEFI-systemen</strong></span></p> + <ul class="itemizedlist"> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p>GRUB2-efi en rEFInd mogen gebruikt worden als opstartlader voor een + UEFI-systeem. + </p> + + </li> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p>Standaard zal een nieuwe opstartlader (Grub2-efi) naar de ESP + (EFI-Systeempartitie) geschreven worden. + </p> + + <p>Als er al op UEFI gebaseerde besturingssystemen op uw computer staan + (bijv. Windows 8), dan detecteert Mageia de bestaande ESP die door Windows + is gemaakt en wordt grub2-efi daaraan toegevoegd. Als er nog geen ESP is, + wordt die gecreëerd. Alhoewel het mogelijk is verscheidene ESP's te hebben, + is één genoeg, ongeacht het aantal besturingssystemen dat u heeft. + </p> + + </li> + </ul> + </div> + </div> - - <div class="itemizedlist" title="Grub2-efi on UEFI systems"> - <p class="title"><b>Grub2-efi on UEFI systems</b></p> - <ul class="itemizedlist"> - <li class="listitem"> - - <p>GRUB2-efi will be used exclusively as the bootloader for a UEFI system.</p> - - </li> - <li class="listitem"> - - <p>By default, a new bootloader (Grub2-efi) will be written into the ESP (EFI - System Partition). - </p> + <div class="section" title="rEFInd"> + <div class="titlepage"> + <div> + <div> + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1018"></a>rEFInd + </h4> + </div> + </div> + </div> - - <p>If there are already UEFI-based operating systems installed on your computer - (Windows 8 for example), the Mageia installer will detect the existing ESP - created by Windows and add grub2-efi to it. If no ESP exists, then one will - be created. Although it is possible to have several ESPs, only one is - required, whatever the number of operating systems you have. - </p> - - </li> - </ul> + + <div class="itemizedlist"> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>rEFInd op UEFI-systemen</strong></span></p> + <ul class="itemizedlist"> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p>rEFInd heeft een prettige grafische set met opties en kan geïnstalleerde + EFI-opstartladers automatisch detecteren. Zie: + http://www.rodsbooks.com/refind/ + </p> + + </li> + </ul> + </div> + + <div class="note" title="Opmerking" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> + <table border="0" summary="Note"> + <tr> + <td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Opmerking]" src="note.png"></td> + <th align="left"></th> + </tr> + <tr> + <td align="left" valign="top"> + + <p>Let op, om de <code class="literal">rEFInd</code>-optie te kunnen gebruiken, moet een + geïnstalleerde EFI-systeempartitie overeenkomen met uw systeemarchitectuur: + als u bijv. een 32bits EFI-systeempartitie geïnstalleerd heeft op een 64bits + machine, dan zal de rEFInd-optie niet zichtbaar/beschikbaar zijn voor u. + </p> + + </td> + </tr> + </table> + </div> + </div> </div> - - <div class="section" title="Bootloader Setup"> + <div class="section" title="Opstartlader-instellingen"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e1014"></a>Bootloader Setup + <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e1028"></a>Opstartlader-instellingen </h3> </div> </div> </div> - <div class="section" title="Algemene opties voor de opstartlader"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1018"></a>Algemene opties voor de opstartlader + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1032"></a>Algemene opties voor de opstartlader </h4> </div> </div> </div> - - <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Bootloader to use</strong></span></p> - + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Welke opstartlader te gebruiken</strong></span></p> - <p>This feature is only available to Legacy MBR/BIOS systems. Users of UEFI - systems will not see this option here. - </p> + <div class="itemizedlist"> + <ul class="itemizedlist"> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p><span class="guimenuitem">GRUB2</span> (met een grafisch menu of een tekst-menu), + kan voor <code class="literal">Legacy MBR/BIOS</code>-systemen en ook voor + <code class="literal">UEFI</code>-systemen gekozen worden. + </p> + + </li> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p><span class="guimenuitem">rEFInd</span> (met een grafisch menu) is een + alternatieve optie, uitsluitend voor gebruik in + <code class="literal">UEFI</code>-systemen. + </p> + + </li> + </ul> + </div> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Boot device</strong></span></p> - + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Opstartapparaat</strong></span></p> + + <div class="warning" title="Waarschuwing" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> + <table border="0" summary="Warning"> + <tr> + <td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Waarschuwing]" src="warning.png"></td> + <th align="left"></th> + </tr> + <tr> + <td align="left" valign="top"> + + <p>Wijzig dit niet, tenzij u echt weet wat u doet.</p> + + </td> + </tr> + </table> + </div> + + <div class="note" title="Opmerking" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> + <table border="0" summary="Note"> + <tr> + <td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Opmerking]" src="note.png"></td> + <th align="left"></th> + </tr> + <tr> + <td align="left" valign="top"> + + <p>Er is geen optie om GRUB naar de opstartsector van een partitie (bijv.: + <code class="filename">sda1</code>) te schrijven, omdat deze methode onbetrouwbaar + geacht wordt. + </p> + + </td> + </tr> + </table> + </div> - <p>Don't change this unless you really know what you are doing</p> + <p>Bij gebruik van UEFI-modus, zal het <span class="guilabel">Opstartapparaat</span> + vermeld staan als <span class="guimenuitem">EFI-Systeempartitie</span>. + </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Delay before booting the default image</strong></span></p> - + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Wachttijd voor het opstarten van de standaard + opstartkeuze</strong></span></p> - <p>This text box lets you set a delay, in seconds, before the default operating - system is started up. + <p>In dit tekstvak kunt u de vertraging in seconden instellen voordat het + standaard besturingssysteem wordt opgestart. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Security</strong></span></p> - + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Beveiliging</strong></span></p> - <p>This allows you to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username - and password will be required when booting in order to select a booting - entry or change settings. This is optional, and most people are not likely - to have a need for it. The username is <code class="literal">root</code> and the - password is the one chosen hereafter. + <p>Hiermee kunt u een wachtwoord instellen voor de opstartlader. Dit betekent + dat tijdens het opstarten een gebruikersnaam en wachtwoord zullen worden + gevraagd waarna u een opstartinvoer kunt selecteren of instellingen kunt + wijzigen. Dit is een optie, de meeste mensen hebben dit waarschijnlijk niet + nodig. De gebruikersnaam is <code class="literal">root</code> en hierna wordt het + wachtwoord gekozen. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Wachtwoord</strong></span></p> - - <p>Choose a password for the bootloader (optional)</p> + <p>Kies een wachtwoord voor de opstartlader (optioneel)</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Password (again)</strong></span></p> - + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Wachtwoord (nogmaals)</strong></span></p> - <p>Retype the password and DrakX will check that it matches with the one set - above + <p>Herhaal het wachtwoord en DrakX zal controleren of het overeenkomt met het + wachtwoord dat hierboven is ingevoerd. </p> </li> </ul> </div> - - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Advanced</em></span></p> - + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Geavanceerd</em></span></p> <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Enable ACPI</em></span></p> - + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>ACPI inschakelen</em></span></p> - <p>ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for power - management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices. Deselecting it - could be useful if, for example, your computer does not support ACPI or if - you think the ACPI implementation might cause some problems (for instance - random reboots or system lockups). + <p>ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is een standaard voor + energiebeheer. Het kan energie besparen door ongebruikte apparaten uit te + schakelen. Het vinkje verwijderen kan nuttig zijn als, bijvoorbeeld, uw + computer ACPI niet ondersteunt of als u denkt dat de ACPI-implementatie + problemen kan veroorzaken (bijvoorbeeld dat het systeem willekeurige opnieuw + opstart of vastloopt). </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Enable SMP</em></span></p> - + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>SMP inschakelen</em></span></p> - <p>This option enables/disables symmetric multiprocessing for multi-core - processors + <p>Deze optie schakelt symmetrische multiprocessing voor multi-core-processors + in/uit. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Enable APIC</em></span></p> - + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>APIC inschakelen</em></span></p> - <p>Enabling this gives the operating system access to the Advanced Programmable - Interrupt Controller. APIC devices permit more complex priority models, and - Advanced IRQ (Interrupt Request) management. + <p>Deze inschakelen geeft het besturingssysteem toegang tot de Advanced + Programmable Interrupt Controller. APIC-apparaten staan complexere + prioriteit-modellen en geavanceerd IRQ- (Onderbrekingsaanvraag-)beheer toe. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Enable Local APIC</em></span></p> - + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Lokale APIC inschakelen</em></span></p> - <p>Here you can set Local APIC, which manages all external interrupts for a - specific processor in an SMP system + <p>Hiermee kunt u de lokale APIC instellen, die beheert alle externe + onderbrekingen voor een specifieke processor in een SMP-systeem. </p> </li> @@ -247,151 +341,220 @@ </div> </div> - - <div class="section" title="Bootloader Configuration"> + <div class="section" title="Configuratie van opstartlader"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1068"></a>Bootloader Configuration + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1098"></a>Configuratie van opstartlader </h4> </div> </div> </div> - - + <p>Als u in de vorige sectie <code class="literal">rEFInd</code> als opstartlader koos, + kreeg u vervolgens de opties die u in de schermafbeelding hieronder ziet. Ga + anders a.u.b. door naar de daarna volgende afbeelding voor uw opties. + </p> + + + <p>Uw rEFInd configuratie-opties:</p> + + <div class="itemizedlist"> + <ul class="itemizedlist"> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Installeren of bijwerken van rEFInd in de + EFI-systeempartitie.</strong></span></p> + + </li> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Installeer in /EFI/BOOT.</strong></span></p> + + <p>Deze optie installeert de opstartlader in de /EFI/BOOT-map van de ESP + (EFI-Systeempartitie). Dit kan nuttig zijn als: + </p> + + <p>(a) U op een verwijderbaar station installeert (bijv. een usb-stick) dat + verwijderd en op een andere machine aangesloten kan worden. Als de + opstartlader in /EFI/BOOT zit, zullen UEFI-BIOS'en dat detecteren en u + toestaan van dat station op te starten. + </p> + + <p>(b) Als tijdelijke oplossing wanneer, door een gebrekkige UEFI -BIOS, de + nieuwe opstartlader voor Mageia niet herkend wordt aan het einde van de + installatie. + </p> + + </li> + </ul> + </div> + + <p>Als u in de vorige sectie niet rEFInd als opstartlader koos, dan ziet u de + configuratie-opties van uw opstartlader hieronder: + </p> + <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Default</strong></span></p> - + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Standaard</strong></span></p> + + <p>Het besturingssysteem dat standaard opgestart moet worden.</p> + + </li> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Toevoegen</strong></span></p> - <p>The operating system to be started up by default.</p> + <p>Met deze optie kunt u kernelinstellingen toevoegen of de kernel bevelen u + meer informatie te geven als hij opstart. + </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Append</strong></span></p> - + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Zoeken naar andere besturingssystemen</strong></span></p> - <p>This option lets you pass information to the kernel or tell the kernel to - give you more information as it boots. + <p>Als u al andere besturingssystemen heeft geïnstalleerd, zal Mageia proberen + om ze toe te voegen aan uw nieuwe Mageia-opstartmenu. Als u dit niet wilt, + verwijder dan het vinkje bij het optie <span class="guimenuitem">Zoeken naar andere + besturingssystemen</span>. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Probe foreign OS</strong></span></p> - + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Installeer in /EFI/BOOT.</strong></span>(Let wel: deze + menu-optie is alleen beschikbaar als het installatieprogramma detecteerde + dat de machine in UEFI-modus is). + </p> + + <p>Deze optie installeert de opstartlader in de /EFI/BOOT-map van de ESP + (EFI-Systeempartitie). Dit kan nuttig zijn als: + </p> + + <p>(a) U op een verwijderbaar station installeert (bijv. een usb-stick) dat + verwijderd en op een andere machine aangesloten kan worden. Als de + opstartlader in /EFI/BOOT zit, zullen UEFI-BIOS'en dat detecteren en u + toestaan van dat station op te starten. + </p> - <p>If you already have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to - add them to your new Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, - then untick the Probe Foreign OS option. + <p>(b) Als tijdelijke oplossing wanneer, door een gebrekkige UEFI -BIOS, de + nieuwe opstartlader voor Mageia niet herkend wordt aan het einde van de + installatie. </p> </li> </ul> </div> - - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Advanced</em></span></p> - + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Geavanceerd</em></span></p> - <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Video mode</em></span></p> - + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Videomodus</em></span></p> - <p>This sets the screen size and colour depth to be used by the boot menu. If - you click the down-triangle you will be offered other size and colour depth - options. + <p>Dit stelt de grootte van het scherm en de kleurdiepte in die het opstartmenu + zal gebruiken. Als u klikt op het omlaag wijzende driehoekje, krijgt u + opties voor andere groottes en kleurdieptes. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Do not touch ESP or MBR</em></span></p> - + <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Kom niet aan de EFI-systeempartitie of de MBR</em></span></p> - <p>Select this option if you don't want a bootable Mageia, but would rather - chain-load it from another OS. You will get a warning that the bootloader is - missing. Click<span class="emphasis"><em> Ok</em></span> if you are sure you understand the - implications, and wish to proceed. + <p>Kies deze optie als u geen opstartbaar Mageia wilt, maar haar via een ander + besturingssysteem wilt starten (chain-loaden). U krijgt een waarschuwing dat + de opstartlader ontbreekt. Klik enkel op <span class="guimenuitem">Ok</span> als u + zeker bent dat u begrijpt wat dit betekent en verder wilt gaan. </p> + + <div class="warning" title="Waarschuwing" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> + <table border="0" summary="Warning"> + <tr> + <td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Waarschuwing]" src="warning.png"></td> + <th align="left"></th> + </tr> + <tr> + <td align="left" valign="top"> + + <p>Chain-loaden met legacy opstartladers (GRUB Legacy en LiLo) wordt niet + langer door Mageia ondersteund, omdat het waarschijnlijk niet lukt deze + Mageia-installatie op die manier te starten. Als u iets anders voor dit doel + gebruikt dan GRUB2 of rEFInd, dan is dat voor eigen risico. + </p> + + </td> + </tr> + </table> + </div> </li> </ul> </div> - </div> </div> - - <div class="section" title="Other Options"> + <div class="section" title="Andere opties"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e1104"></a>Other Options + <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e1160"></a>Andere opties </h3> </div> </div> </div> - <div class="section" title="Een bestaande opstartlader gebruiken"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1106"></a>Een bestaande opstartlader gebruiken + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1162"></a>Een bestaande opstartlader gebruiken </h4> </div> </div> </div> - - <p>The exact procedure for adding Mageia to an existing bootloader is beyond - the scope of this documentation. However in most cases it will involve - running the relevant bootloader installation program, which should detect - Mageia and automatically add an entry for it in the bootloader menu. See the - documentation for the relevant operating system. + <p>De precieze procedure om Mageia aan een bestaande opstartlader toe te + voegen, valt buiten het bereik van deze documentatie. In de meeste gevallen + is het nodig het installatieprogramma van de betreffende opstartlader te + gebruiken, dat Mageia automatisch zou moeten detecteren en haar automatisch + zou moeten toevoegen aan het keuzemenu van de opstartlader. Zie de + documentatie van het betreffende besturingssysteem. </p> </div> - - <div class="section" title="Installing Without a Bootloader"> + <div class="section" title="Installeren zonder opstartlader"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1109"></a>Installing Without a Bootloader + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1165"></a>Installeren zonder opstartlader </h4> </div> </div> </div> - - <p>While you can opt to install Mageia without a bootloader (see section 2.1 - Advanced), this is not recommended unless you absolutely know what you are - doing, as without some form of bootloader your operating system will be - unable to start. + <p>Alhoewel u Mageia zonder opstartlader kunt installeren (zie sectie 2.1 + Geavanceerd), wordt dit niet aanbevolen, tenzij u prima weet wat u doet, + omdat uw besturingssysteem zonder een opstartlader niet kan starten. </p> </div> - <div lang="nl" class="section" title="Wijzig een opstartmenu-ingang of voeg er een toe"> <div class="titlepage"> @@ -407,9 +570,9 @@ - <p>To do this you need to manually edit /boot/grub2/custom.cfg or use the - software <span class="bold"><strong>grub-customizer</strong></span> tool instead - (available in the Mageia repositories). + <p>Om dit te doen moet u handmatig /boot/grub2/custom.cfg bewerken of in + plaats daarvan de tool<span class="bold"><strong>grub-customizer</strong></span> + gebruiken (verkrijgbaar in de Mageia-bronnen). </p> @@ -422,7 +585,7 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p>For more information, see: <a class="ulink" href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia" target="_top">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia</a></p> + <p>Voor meer informatie, zie: <a class="ulink" href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia" target="_top">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia</a></p> </td> </tr> diff --git a/nl/setupSCSI.html b/nl/setupSCSI.html index 85feaa2..e6e76b5 100644 --- a/nl/setupSCSI.html +++ b/nl/setupSCSI.html @@ -45,15 +45,15 @@ - <p><a name="setupSCSI-pa1"></a>DrakX will normally detect hard disks correctly. However, with some older - SCSI controllers it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use - and subsequently fail to recognise the drive. + <p><a name="setupSCSI-pa1"></a>DrakX herkent harde schijven gewoonlijk correct, maar het kan zijn dat hij + sommige oudere SCSI-schijfcontrollers niet herkent , daardoor verzuimt het + juiste stuurprogramma te gebruiken en dan de schijf niet herkent. </p> - <p><a name="setupSCSI-pa2"></a>If your device is not recognised, you will need to manually tell DrakX which - SCSI drive(s) you have. DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) - correctly. + <p><a name="setupSCSI-pa2"></a>Als uw apparaat niet herkend wordt, moet u DrakX handmatig vertellen welk + SCSI-station u heeft. Daarna zou DrakX het station goed moeten kunnen + instellen. </p> </div> diff --git a/nl/software.html b/nl/software.html index eba4bcb..1c88386 100644 --- a/nl/software.html +++ b/nl/software.html @@ -28,11 +28,11 @@ - <div class="section" title="Media Selection"> + <div class="section" title="Mediaselectie"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e703"></a>Media Selection + <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e705"></a>Mediaselectie </h3> </div> </div> @@ -65,13 +65,13 @@ <p>In dit scherm ziet u de lijst van reeds gevonden media. U kunt andere - pakketbronnen toevoegen, zoals een optische schijf of een netwerkbron. De + pakkettendepots toevoegen, zoals een optische schijf of een netwerkdepot. De mediaselectie bepaalt welke pakketten in de volgende stappen beschikbaar zullen zijn. </p> - <p>Voor een netwerkbron dienen twee stappen gevolgd te worden:</p> + <p>Voor een netwerkdepot dienen twee stappen gevolgd te worden:</p> <div class="orderedlist"> @@ -83,11 +83,12 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Kiezen van een mirror of specificeren van een URL (de allereerste - keuze). Door een mirror te kiezen heeft u toegang tot alle bronnen die - beheerd worden door Mageia, zoals de <span class="emphasis"><em>Nonfree-</em></span>, - <span class="emphasis"><em>Tainted-</em></span> en <span class="emphasis"><em>Updates</em></span>bronnen. Met de - URL kunt u ook een specifieke bron opgeven of uw eigen NFS-installatie. + <p>Kiezen van een spiegelserver of specificeren van een URL (de allereerste + keuze). Door een spiegelserver te kiezen heeft u toegang tot alle + pakkettendepots die beheerd worden door Mageia, zoals de + <span class="emphasis"><em>Nonfree-</em></span>, <span class="emphasis"><em>Tainted-</em></span> en + <span class="emphasis"><em>Updates</em></span>bronnen. Met de URL kunt u ook een specifiek + depot opgeven of uw eigen NFS-installatie. </p> </li> @@ -105,10 +106,10 @@ <td align="left" valign="top"> <p>Als u een 64-bitsinstallatie die mogelijk enige 32-bitspakketten bevat, - opwaardeert, voeg dan hier een online mirror toe door één van de + bijwerkt, voeg dan hier een online spiegelserver toe door één van de netwerkprotocollen te selecteren. De 64-bits-dvd bevat enkel 64-bits- en <span class="emphasis"><em>noarch-</em></span>pakketten, hij kan geen 32-bitspakketten - opwaarderen. Dat kan echter wel als u een online mirror toevoegt, de + opwaarderen. Dat kan echter wel als u een online spiegelserver toevoegt, de 32-bitspakketten worden dan daar opgehaald. </p> @@ -120,11 +121,11 @@ </div> - <div lang="nl" class="section" title="Available Media"> + <div lang="nl" class="section" title="Beschikbare media"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="media_selection"></a>Available Media + <h4 class="title"><a name="media_selection"></a>Beschikbare media </h4> </div> </div> @@ -146,10 +147,10 @@ - <p>Hier vindt u de lijst van beschikbare bronnen. Niet alle bronnen zijn - beschikbaar, overeenkomstig de media die U gebruikt om van te - installeren. De selectie van bronnen bepaalt welke pakketten beschikbaar - zijn ter keuze in de volgende stappen. + <p>Hier vindt u de lijst van beschikbare pakkettendepots. Niet alle depots zijn + beschikbaar, overeenkomstig de media die u gebruikt om van te + installeren. De selectie van depots bepaalt welke pakketten beschikbaar zijn + ter keuze in de volgende stappen. </p> @@ -157,28 +158,29 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>De <span class="emphasis"><em>Core</em></span> bron kan niet uitgeschakeld worden, want ze + <p>Het <span class="emphasis"><em>Core</em></span> depot kan niet uitgeschakeld worden, want ze bevat de basis van de distributie. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>The <span class="emphasis"><em>Nonfree</em></span> repository includes packages that are - free-of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain - closed-source software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this - repository includes nVidia and AMD graphics card proprietary drivers, - firmware for various WiFi cards, etc. + <p>Het <span class="emphasis"><em>Nonfree</em></span> depot bevat pakketten die Mageia vrij mag + verspreiden, maar waarvan de broncode niet beschikbaar is (vandaar de naam + Nonfree, oftewel Nietvrij). Dit depot bevat bijvoorbeeld fabrikantseigen + stuurprogramma's van nVidia en ATI voor grafische kaarten, firmware voor + diverse WiFi-kaarten, enz. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>The <span class="emphasis"><em>Tainted</em></span> repository includes packages released under - a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is - that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, - e.g. multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages - needed to play commercial video DVD's, etc. + <p>Het <span class="emphasis"><em>Tainted</em></span> depot bevat pakketten die zijn uitgegeven + onder een vrije licentie. Het belangrijkste criterium voor plaatsing in dit + depot is, dat zij inbreuk kunnen maken op patenten en auteursrecht in + sommige landen, bijvoorbeeld multimedia-codecs die nodig zijn om diverse + audio/video bestanden te spelen en pakketten om commerciële video-dvd's af + te spelen enz. </p> </li> @@ -214,12 +216,14 @@ - <p>Some choices made here will open other screens with related options.</p> + <p>Sommige keuzes die hier worden gemaakt, openen andere schermen met + bijbehorende opties. + </p> - <p>After the selection step(s), you will see a slideshow during the - installation of required packages. The slideshow can be disabled by pressing - the <span class="emphasis"><em>Details</em></span> button. + <p>Na de keuzestap(pen), zult u tijdens het installeren van de benodigde + pakketten een diapresentatie zien. Deze kan uitgezet worden door op + <span class="emphasis"><em>Details</em></span> te klikken. </p> @@ -229,18 +233,18 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Choose whether you prefer to use the KDE Plasma or GNOME desktop - environment. Both come with a full set of useful applications and tools. + <p>Kies of u de KDE-Plasma- of de GNOME-werkomgeving wilt gebruiken. Beide + bevatten een volledige set nuttige programma's en hulpprogramma's. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Select <span class="emphasis"><em>Custom</em></span> if you do not wish to use either (or, - actually use both) of these, or if you want to modify the default software - choices for these desktop environments. The LXDE desktop, for instance, is - lighter than the previous two, sporting less eye candy and having fewer - packages installed by default. + <p>Kies <span class="emphasis"><em>Aangepast</em></span> als u geen van beide wilt gebruiken (of + allebei), of als u iets anders wilt dan de standaard softwareselectie voor + deze werkomgevingen. De LXDE-werkomgeving, bijvoorbeeld, vraagt minder van + de computer, is minder oogstrelend en heeft een kleinere standaard + softwareselectie dan de twee eerder genoemde. </p> </li> @@ -303,7 +307,7 @@ </div> - <p>See <a class="xref" href="software.html#minimal-install" title="Minimale installatie">Minimal Install</a> for instructions on how to do a + <p>See <a class="xref" href="software.html#minimal-install" title="Minimale installatie">Minimale installatie</a> for instructions on how to do a minimal install (without or with X & IceWM). </p> @@ -337,10 +341,11 @@ - <p>Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for - Mageia, such as a server or a specialised workstation. You will probably use - this option combined with the <span class="emphasis"><em>Individual package - selection</em></span> option to fine-tune your installation. See <a class="xref" href="software.html#choosePackagesTree" title="Softwarebeheer">Choose Packages Tree</a>. + <p>Minimale installatie is bedoeld voor degenen die Mageia op een bepaalde + manier willen gebruiken, zoals als server of gespecialiseerd + werkstation. Waarschijnlijk gebruikt u deze optie samen met voornoemde + <span class="emphasis"><em>Individuele-pakketselectie</em></span>-optie om uw installatie naar + wens aan te passen, zie <a class="xref" href="software.html#choosePackagesTree" title="Softwarebeheer">Kies Pakkettenboom</a>. </p> @@ -348,27 +353,27 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>You can choose a <span class="emphasis"><em>Minimal Installation</em></span> by de-selecting - everything in the <span class="emphasis"><em>Package Group Selection</em></span> screen, see + <p>U kunt een <span class="emphasis"><em>minimale installatie</em></span> kiezen door alles in + het <span class="emphasis"><em>Pakketgroepselectie</em></span>scherm te deselecteren, zie <a class="xref" href="software.html#choosePackageGroups" title="Pakketgroepselectie">Choose Package Groups</a>. </p> - <p>If desired, you can additionally tick the <span class="emphasis"><em>Individual package - selection</em></span> option in the same screen. + <p>Indien gewenst, kunt u vervolgens ook <span class="emphasis"><em>Individuele + pakketselectie</em></span> aanvinken in hetzelfde scherm. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>If you choose this installation method, then the relevant screen (see - screenshot below) will offer you a few useful extras to install, such as - documentation and <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">X</span>”</span>. + <p>Als u deze installatiemethode kiest, zal het bijbehorende scherm (zie de + afbeelding hieronder) u een aantal bruikbare extra's bieden om te + installeren, zoals documentatie en <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">X</span>”</span>. </p> - <p>If the <span class="emphasis"><em>With X</em></span> option is selected, then IceWM (a - lightweight desktop environment) will also be included. + <p>Als <span class="emphasis"><em>Met X</em></span> is aangevinkt, dan wordt IceWM (een + lichtgewicht werkomgeving) ook geïnstalleerd. </p> </li> @@ -376,10 +381,10 @@ </div> - <p>The basic documentation is provided in the form of <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">man</span>”</span> and - <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">info</span>”</span> pages. It contains the man pages from the <a class="ulink" href="http://www.tldp.org/manpages/man.html" target="_top">Linux Documentation - Project</a> and the <a class="ulink" href="http://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/" target="_top">GNU - coreutils</a> info pages. + <p>De basisdocumentatie wordt geleverd in de vorm van <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">man</span>”</span>- en + <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">info</span>”</span>-pagina's. Ze bevat de manpagina's van het <a class="ulink" href="http://www.tldp.org/manpages/man.html" target="_top">Linux Documentation + Project</a> en de info-pagina's van <a class="ulink" href="http://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/" target="_top">GNU + coreutils</a>. </p> @@ -407,16 +412,17 @@ - <p>Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customize your - installation. + <p>Hier kunt u extra pakketten toevoegen of verwijderen om uw installatie aan + uw wensen aan te passen. </p> - <p>After having made your choice, you can click on the - <span class="emphasis"><em>floppy</em></span> icon at the bottom of the page to save your - choice of packages (saving to a USB key works, too). You can then use this - file to install the same packages on another system, by pressing the same - button during install and choosing to load it. + <p>Nadat u uw keuze gemaakt hebt kunt u onderaan de pagina op de + <span class="emphasis"><em>floppy</em></span>-icoon klikken om uw keuze op te slaan (op een + usb-stick opslaan werkt ook). Daarna kunt u dat bestand gebruiken om + dezelfde pakketten op een ander systeem te installeren door tijdens de + installatie op dezelfde knop te klikken en er voor te kiezen het bestand te + laden. </p> </div> diff --git a/nl/soundConfig.html b/nl/soundConfig.html index c8f6a67..b33a291 100644 --- a/nl/soundConfig.html +++ b/nl/soundConfig.html @@ -23,28 +23,28 @@ </div> </div> - - - - - - + <p>In dit scherm ziet u de naam van het stuurprogramma dat het + installatieprogramma koos voor uw geluidskaart. Het is het + standaardstuurprogramma als dat bestaat. + </p> - <p>This screen shows the details of the sound card driver chosen for you by the - installer, and this driver should work without problems. + <p>Het standaardstuurprogramma zou zonder problemen moeten werken. Komt u na de + installatie toch problemen tegen, start dan <span class="command"><strong>draksound</strong></span> of + start MCC (Mageia Configuratiecentrum), klik op de + <span class="guilabel">Apparatuur</span> tab en dan op + <span class="guilabel">Audioconfiguratie</span> rechts boven in het scherm. </p> - - <p>However, if you encounter any issues post-install, then run - <span class="command"><strong>draksound</strong></span> or start this tool via <span class="guimenu">Mageia Control Center</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Hardware</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Sound Configuration</span>. Then, in the - <code class="literal">draksound</code> or <span class="emphasis"><em>Sound Configuration</em></span> - screen, click on <span class="emphasis"><em>Troubleshooting</em></span> to find useful advice - about how to solve the problem. + <p>Met dit hulpprogramma kunt u kiezen welke backend de geluidsserver zal + worden, dus het geluid zal beheren. U heeft de keuze tussen pulseaudio and + pipewire. Voor de laatste kunt u kiezen tussen de sessiebeheerders + <code class="literal">Wireplumber</code> en <code class="literal">Pipewire Media + Session</code>. Na het toepassen van de nieuwe instellingen, worden de + benodigde pakketten geïnstalleerd en wordt de server geconfigureerd. </p> - <div class="section" title="Geavanceerd"> <div class="titlepage"> @@ -56,13 +56,13 @@ </div> </div> - - <p>If there is no actual default driver for your sound card, there may be other - possible alternative drivers available to choose from. If this is the case, - but you think the installer has not made the most appropriate choice, you - can click on <span class="emphasis"><em>Advanced</em></span> to manually specify a driver. + <p>Als u in dit scherm op <span class="bold"><strong><span class="guibutton">Geavanceerd</span></strong></span> klikt, krijgt u de + keuze om de instellingen van de audiomixer terug te zetten naar de + standaardwaarden. </p> + + <p></p> </div> diff --git a/nl/uninstall-Mageia.html b/nl/uninstall-Mageia.html index a9a2e8f..baac99b 100644 --- a/nl/uninstall-Mageia.html +++ b/nl/uninstall-Mageia.html @@ -30,39 +30,39 @@ - <p>If Mageia didn't convince you or you can't install it correctly - in short - you want get rid of it - that is your right and Mageia also gives you the - possibility to uninstall. This is not true for every operating system. + <p>Mageia bevalt u niet of het lukte niet het correct te installeren, kortom: u + wil er vanaf - dat is uw recht en Mageia geeft u ook de mogelijkheid om de + installatie ongedaan te maken. Dat geldt niet voor elk besturingssysteem. </p> - <p>After backing up your data, reboot your Mageia installation DVD and select - <span class="emphasis"><em>Rescue system</em></span>, then <span class="emphasis"><em>Restore Windows boot - loader</em></span>. At the next boot, you will only have Windows, with no - option to choose your Mageia operating system. + <p>Maak eerst een backup van uw gegevens. Start daarna op vanaf uw + Mageia-installatie-dvd en selecteer <span class="emphasis"><em>Rescue system</em></span>, dan, + <span class="emphasis"><em>Restore Windows boot loader</em></span>. Voortaan heeft u enkel + Windows bij het opstarten, zonder optie om uw Mageia-besturingssysteem te + kiezen. </p> - <p>In Windows, to recover the space used by Mageia partitions: click on - <span class="guimenu">Start</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Control - Panel</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Administrative Tools</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Computer Management</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Storage</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Disk - Management</span>. You will recognise a Mageia - partition because they are labeled <code class="literal">Unknown</code>, and also by - their size and place on the disk. Right-click on each of these partitions - and select <span class="emphasis"><em>Delete</em></span> to free up the space. + <p>Om in Windows de ruimte terug te krijgen die door de Mageia partities werd + gebruikt, klikt u op <span class="guimenu">Start</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Configuratiescherm</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Beheerprogramma's + </span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Computerbeheer</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Opslag</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Schijfbeheer</span>. U zult de Mageia partities herkennen aan het label + <code class="literal">Onbekend</code> en ook aan hun grootte en plaats op de + schijf. Rechtsklik op elk van deze partities en kies + <span class="emphasis"><em>Verwijderen</em></span> om de ruimte vrij te maken. </p> - <p>If you are using Windows XP, you can create a new partition and format it - (FAT32 or NTFS). It will then get a partition letter. + <p>Bij Windows XP kon u een nieuwe partitie maken en die formatteren (FAT32 of + NTFS). De partitie kreeg een partitie-letter. </p> - <p>If you have Vista or 7, you have one more possibility, you can extend the - existing partition that is at the left of the freed space. There are other - partitioning tools that can be used, such as <span class="bold"><strong>gparted</strong></span>, available for both Windows and Linux. As - always, when changing partitions, be very careful to back up anything - important to you. + <p>Als u Vista or 7 heeft, heeft u nog een mogelijkheid: u kunt de partitie + links van de vrije ruimte vergroten. Er zijn andere partitioneringstools + die gebruikt kunnen worden, zoals <span class="bold"><strong>gparted</strong></span>, + beschikbaar voor zowel Windows als Linux. Zoals altijd, bij het wijzigen van + partities, maak eerst een goede back-up van alles dat u belangrijk vindt. </p> </div> diff --git a/soundConfig.html b/soundConfig.html index 9ff548f..294669c 100644 --- a/soundConfig.html +++ b/soundConfig.html @@ -23,28 +23,24 @@ </div> </div> - - - - - - + <p>In this screen the name of the driver that the installer chose for + your sound card is given, which will be the default driver if one + exists. + </p> - <p>This screen shows the details of the sound card driver chosen for you - by the installer, and this driver should work without problems. + <p>The default driver should work without problems. However, if after + install you do encounter problems, then run <span class="command"><strong>draksound</strong></span> or + start this tool via MCC (Mageia Control Center), by choosing the + <span class="guilabel">Hardware</span> tab and clicking on <span class="guilabel">Sound + Configuration</span> at the top right of the screen. </p> - - <p>However, if you encounter any issues post-install, then run - <span class="command"><strong>draksound</strong></span> or start this tool via <span class="guimenu">Mageia Control Center</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Hardware</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Sound Configuration</span>. Then, in the <code class="literal">draksound</code> or - <span class="emphasis"><em>Sound Configuration</em></span> screen, click on - <span class="emphasis"><em>Troubleshooting</em></span> to find useful advice about how to - solve the problem. + <p>With this tool, you can choose which backend will become the sound server, so manage the sound. You have the choice between + pulseaudio and pipewire. For the second, you can choose a session manager <code class="literal">Wireplumber</code> or <code class="literal">Pipewire Media Session</code>. After applying the new configuration, the needed packages will be installed and services configured. </p> - <div class="section" title="Advanced"> <div class="titlepage"> @@ -56,14 +52,11 @@ </div> </div> - - <p>If there is no actual default driver for your sound card, there may - be other possible alternative drivers available to choose from. If this is - the case, but you think the installer has not made the most appropriate - choice, you can click on <span class="emphasis"><em>Advanced</em></span> to manually specify - a driver. + <p>Clicking <span class="bold"><strong><span class="guibutton">Advanced</span></strong></span> in this screen, you will have the choice to reset the sound mixer configuration to default values. </p> + + <p></p> </div> diff --git a/sq/acceptLicense.html b/sq/acceptLicense.html index f422ef3..c4cdac5 100644 --- a/sq/acceptLicense.html +++ b/sq/acceptLicense.html @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ <head> <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8"> - <title>Liçenca dhe Shënime Lëshimit</title> + <title>Liçenca dhe Shënime Lëshimi</title> <meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"> <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Instalim me DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Instalim me DrakX"> @@ -13,11 +13,11 @@ table { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } --></style></head> <body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"> - <div lang="sq" class="section" title="Liçenca dhe Shënime Lëshimit"> + <div lang="sq" class="section" title="Liçenca dhe Shënime Lëshimi"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h2 class="title"><a name="acceptLicense"></a>Liçenca dhe Shënime Lëshimit + <h2 class="title"><a name="acceptLicense"></a>Liçenca dhe Shënime Lëshimi </h2> </div> </div> diff --git a/sq/addUser.html b/sq/addUser.html index 032a01e..37c1603 100644 --- a/sq/addUser.html +++ b/sq/addUser.html @@ -23,12 +23,23 @@ </div> </div> + + + + + + + + + + + <div class="section" title="Vendos Fjalëkalim administratori (root):"> <div class="titlepage"> @@ -40,16 +51,15 @@ </div> </div> + - <p>Është e këshillueshme që të gjitha instalimet Mageia të vendosin një - fjalëkalim për <code class="literal">superuser</code> (Administrator), zakonisht quhet - fjalëkalim <span class="emphasis"><em>root </em></span>në Linux. Ndërsa shkruani një - fjalëkalim në kutinë e sipërme, një mburojë do të ndryshojë nga e kuqe në të - verdhë në të gjelbër në varësi të fuqisë së fjalëkalimit. Një mburojë e - gjelbër tregon se po përdorni një fjalëkalim të fortë. Ju duhet të - përsërisni të njëjtin fjalëkalim në kutinë poshtë, për të parë nëse hyrja e - parë nuk është gabuar. + <p>Është e këshillueshme që në të gjitha instalimet e Mageia të vendosni një + fjalëkalim <code class="literal">superuser</code> (Administrator), zakonisht quhet + fjalëkalimi i <span class="emphasis"><em>root </em></span>në Linux. Ju duhet të përsërisni të + njëjtin fjalëkalim në kutinë poshtë, për të kontrolluar që fjalëkalimi i + parë nuk ishte shkruar gabim. </p> + <div class="note" title="Shënim" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> <table border="0" summary="Note"> @@ -60,6 +70,13 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> + <p>Ndërsa shkruani një fjalëkalim në kutinë e sipërme, një mburojë do të + ndryshojë nga e kuqe në të verdhë në të gjelbër në varësi të fuqisë së + fjalëkalimit. Një mburojë e gjelbër tregon se jeni duke përdorur një + fjalëkalim të fortë. + </p> + + <p>Të gjitha fjalëkalimet janë germa të vogla. Është mirë të përdorni një përzierje letrash (shkronja të mëdha dhe të vogla), numra dhe karaktere të tjerë në një fjalëkalim. @@ -71,6 +88,7 @@ </div> </div> + <div class="section" title="Fut një përdorues"> <div class="titlepage"> @@ -82,18 +100,21 @@ </div> </div> + <p>Shto një përdorues këtu. Një përdorues i rregullt ka më pak privilegje sesa <code class="literal">superuser</code> (root), por të mjaftueshme për të përdorur internetin, programet e zyrës ose lojërat dhe çdo gjë tjetër që përdoruesi mesatar mund të përdorë në një kompjuter. </p> + <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Ikonë</strong></span></p> + <p>Klikoni mbi këtë buton nëse dëshironi të ndryshoni ikonën e përdoruesit</p> @@ -101,6 +122,7 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Emri Vërtetë</strong></span></p> + <p>Futni emrin e vërtetë të përdoruesit në këtë kuti teksti</p> @@ -108,20 +130,24 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Emër Hyrës</strong></span></p> + <p>Futni emrin e përdoruesit ose le DrakX përdorni një version të emrit të vërtetë të përdoruesit. <span class="bold"><strong>Emri i identifikimit është i ndjeshëm.</strong></span></p> + </li> <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Fjalëkalimi</strong></span></p> + - <p>Shkruani fjalëkalimin e përdoruesit. Ekziston një mburojë në fund të kutisë - së tekstit që tregon fuqinë e fjalëkalimit. (Shih gjithashtu <a class="xref" href="addUser.html#givePassword" title="Shënim">Shënim</a>) + <p>Shkruani fjalëkalimin e përdoruesit (duke kujtuar këshillën në Shënimin e + mësipërm). </p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Fjalëkalimin (përsëri):</strong></span> Rivendos fjalëkalimin e përdoruesit. DrakX do të kontrollojë nëse nuk e keni gabuar @@ -131,6 +157,7 @@ </li> </ul> </div> + <div class="note" title="Shënim" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> <table border="0" summary="Note"> @@ -144,11 +171,13 @@ <p>Çdo përdorues i shtuar gjatë instalimit të Mageia, do të ketë një dosje home që lexohet dhe shkruhet në mënyrë të mbrojtur (umask=0027) </p> + <p>Ju mund të shtoni ndonjë përdorues shtesë të nevojshëm në hapat <span class="emphasis"><em>Konfigurimi - Përmbledhje</em></span> gjatë instalimit. Zgjedh <span class="emphasis"><em>Menaxhimi Përdoruesit</em></span>. </p> + <p>Lejet hyrëse gjithashtu mund të ndryshohet pas instalimit.</p> @@ -158,6 +187,7 @@ </div> </div> + <div class="section" title="Administrim Përdoruesit (përparuar)"> <div class="titlepage"> @@ -169,10 +199,12 @@ </div> </div> + <p>Opsioni <span class="emphasis"><em>Përparuar</em></span> ju lejon të redaktoni cilësime të mëtejshme për përdoruesin që po shtoni. </p> + <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> diff --git a/sq/diskPartitioning.html b/sq/diskPartitioning.html index 4a7f6d6..b893df0 100644 --- a/sq/diskPartitioning.html +++ b/sq/diskPartitioning.html @@ -37,6 +37,10 @@ </div> </div> </div> + + + + @@ -95,27 +99,18 @@ Windows</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="suggestedPartitioning-pa9"></a>Nëse keni hapësirë të papërdorur në një ndarje ekzistuese të Windows-it, - instaluesi mund të ofrojë ta përdorni atë. Kjo mund të jetë një mënyrë e - dobishme për të bërë hapësira për instalimin tuaj të ri të Mageia, por është - një operacion i rrezikshëm kështu që duhet të siguroheni që keni kopjuar të - gjitha skedarët e rëndësishme! - </p> - - - <p>Me këtë alternativë, instaluesi shfaq ndarjen e mbetur të Windows në dritën - blu dhe ndarjen e propozuar Mageia në blu të errët me madhësinë e synuar - vetëm nën. Ju keni mundësi të modifikoni këto madhësi duke klikuar dhe - zvarritur hendekun midis të dy ndarjeve. Shikoni fotografinë në vijim: + <p><a name="suggestedPartitioning-pa9"></a>Nëse keni hapësirë të papërdorur në një ndarje ekzistuese të Windows, + instaluesi mund të ofrojë ta përdorë atë. Kjo mund të jetë një mënyrë e + dobishme për të bërë vend për instalimin tuaj të ri Mageia, por shihni + paralajmërimin më poshtë. </p> - - </li> - <li class="listitem"> - - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa12"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Fshirja dhe përdorni Gjithë Diskun</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa13"></a>Kjo alternativë do të ndajë të gjithë diskun për Mageia + <p>Me këtë alternativë, instaluesi shfaq ndarjen e mbetur të Windows në blu të + lehtë dhe ndarjen e propozuar Mageia në blu të errët me madhësitë e synuara + pikërisht poshtë. Ju keni mundësinë për të modifikuar këto madhësi duke + klikuar dhe zvarritur hendekun midis të dy ndarjeve. Shihni pamjen e + mëposhtme të ekranit: </p> @@ -128,10 +123,9 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa14"></a>Kjo do të fshijë TË GJITHA të dhënat në diskun e zgjedhur. Kujdesu! Nëse - keni ndërmend të përdorni një pjesë të diskut për diçka tjetër, ose tashmë - keni të dhëna në diskun dhe nuk jeni të përgatitur për ta humbur, atëherë - mos e përdorni këtë alternativë. + <p>Kjo përfshinë zvogëlimin e madhësisë së ndarjes së Windows, dhe për këtë + arsye është një operacion i rrezikshëm, kështu që duhet të siguroheni që + keni ruajtur të gjithë skedarët e rëndësishëm përpara se të vazhdoni. </p> </td> @@ -149,12 +143,40 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa11"></a>Vini re se kjo përfshin pakësimin madhësinë e ndarjes Windows. Ndarja duhet - të jetë "e pastër", që do të thotë që Windows duhet të jenë mbyllur në - mënyrë korrekte herën e fundit që është përdorur. Ajo duhet të ketë qenë - de-fragmentuar, edhe pse kjo nuk është një garanci që të gjitha dosjet në - ndarje janë zhvendosur nga zona që është gati për t'u përdorur. Është shumë - e rekomanduar për të ruajtur dosjet tuaja personale rezervë. + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa11"></a>Ndarja duhet të jetë "e pastër", që do të thotë se Windows duhet të jetë + mbyllur saktë herën e fundit kur është përdorur. Duhet gjithashtu të jetë + defragmentuar, megjithëse kjo nuk është një garanci që të gjitha skedarët në + ndarje janë zhvendosur nga zona që do të përdoret për Mageia. + </p> + + </td> + </tr> + </table> + </div> + + </li> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa12"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Fshirja dhe përdorni Gjithë Diskun</strong></span></p> + + + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa13"></a>Kjo alternativë do të ndajë të gjithë diskun për Mageia + </p> + + + <div class="warning" title="Paralajmërim" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> + <table border="0" summary="Warning"> + <tr> + <td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Paralajmërim]" src="warning.png"></td> + <th align="left"></th> + </tr> + <tr> + <td align="left" valign="top"> + + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa14"></a>Kjo do të fshijë TË GJITHA të dhënat në diskun e zgjedhur. Kujdesu! Nëse + keni ndërmend të përdorni një pjesë të diskut për diçka tjetër, ose tashmë + keni të dhëna në diskun dhe nuk jeni të përgatitur për ta humbur, atëherë + mos e përdorni këtë alternativë. </p> </td> @@ -177,8 +199,6 @@ </div> - - <p>Nëse nuk po përdorni alternativën <span class="emphasis"><em>Modifiko ndarjet diskut</em></span>, atëherë instaluesi do të caktojë hapësirën në dispozicion sipas rregullave të mëposhtme: @@ -537,8 +557,10 @@ - - + + + + @@ -557,9 +579,9 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><a name="diskdrake-pa4"></a>Ekziston një skedë në krye për çdo disku të zbuluar (ose pajisje tjetër - ruajtëse, si një çelës USB). Në pamjen më lart ekzistojnë dy pajisje të - disponueshme: <code class="filename">sda </code>dhe <code class="filename">sdb</code>. + <p><a name="diskdrake-pa4"></a>Ekziston një skedë në krye për çdo disk të zbuluar (ose pajisje të tjera + ruajtëse, si USB), për shembull: <code class="filename">sda</code>, + <code class="filename">sdb</code>, <code class="filename">sdc</code> etj. </p> </li> diff --git a/sq/firewall.html b/sq/firewall.html index 750838c..5e17bfd 100644 --- a/sq/firewall.html +++ b/sq/firewall.html @@ -29,6 +29,8 @@ + + <p><a name="firewall-pa1"></a>Ky seksion ju lejon të konfiguroni disa rregulla të thjeshta firewall: ata përcaktojnë se cili lloj i mesazhit nga interneti do të pranohet nga sistemi i synuar. Kjo, nga ana tjetër, lejon që shërbimet përkatëse në sistem të @@ -36,6 +38,8 @@ </p> + + <p>Në cilësimin e parazgjedhura (asnjë buton nuk është i kontrolluar), asnjë shërbim i sistemit nuk mund të arrihet nga rrjeti. Alternativa <span class="emphasis"><em>Gjithçka (jo firewall)</em></span> mundëson qasje në të gjitha @@ -68,15 +72,15 @@ <table border="0" summary="Simple list" class="simplelist"> <tr> - <td>- <span class="emphasis"><em><port-number></em></span> është vlera e portit të caktuar për - shërbimin që dëshironi të mundësoni (p.sh. 873 për shërbimin RSYNC) siç - përcaktohet në <span class="emphasis"><em>RFC-433</em></span>; + <td>- <span class="emphasis"><em><port-number></em></span> është vlera e portës së caktuar + për shërbimin që dëshironi të aktivizoni (e.g. 873 për shërbimet e RSYNC) + siç përcaktohet në <span class="emphasis"><em>RFC-433</em></span>; </td> </tr> <tr> - <td>- <span class="emphasis"><em><protocol></em></span> është një nga protokollet e internetit - që përdoren nga shërbimi <span class="emphasis"><em>TCP</em></span> ose - <span class="emphasis"><em>UDP</em></span>. + <td>- <span class="emphasis"><em><protocol></em></span> është një nga + <span class="emphasis"><em>TCP</em></span> ose <span class="emphasis"><em>UDP</em></span> - protokolli i + internetit që përdoret nga shërbimi. </td> </tr> </table> diff --git a/sq/graphicalConfiguration.html b/sq/graphicalConfiguration.html index 0db94b0..143bf8d 100644 --- a/sq/graphicalConfiguration.html +++ b/sq/graphicalConfiguration.html @@ -51,6 +51,8 @@ + + <p><a name="configureX_chooser-pa1"></a>Pa marrë parasysh se cili mjedis grafik (i njohur edhe si mjedis desktop) që zgjodhët për këtë instalim të Mageia, të gjitha këto janë të bazuara në një sistem grafik të ndërfaqes së përdoruesit të quajtur <code class="literal">X Window @@ -73,7 +75,7 @@ <p>Nëse keni nevojë, mund të zgjidhni një kartë të veçantë nga kjo listë e - zgjeruar. Shiko <a class="xref" href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_card_list" title="Zgjidhni një X Server (Konfiguro Kartën tuaj Grafike)">seksioni i quajtur “Zgjidhni një X Server (Konfiguro Kartën tuaj Grafike)”</a>. + zgjeruar. Shiko <a class="xref" href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_card_list" title="Zgjidhni një X Server (Konfiguro Kartën tuaj Grafike)">Zgjidhni një X Server (Konfiguro Kartën tuaj Grafike)</a>. </p> </li> @@ -86,7 +88,7 @@ monitorin tuaj nga <span class="emphasis"><em>Shitës</em></span> ose listën <span class="emphasis"><em>Përgjithshme</em></span>. Zgjedh <span class="emphasis"><em>Modifiko</em></span> nëse preferoni të vendosni manualisht vlerat e rifreskimit horizontale dhe - vertikale të monitoruesit tuaj. Shiko <a class="xref" href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_monitor" title="Zgjidhni Monitorin tuaj">seksioni i quajtur “Zgjidhni Monitorin tuaj”</a>. + vertikale të monitoruesit tuaj. Shiko <a class="xref" href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_monitor" title="Zgjidhni Monitorin tuaj">Zgjidhni Monitorin tuaj</a>. </p> </li> @@ -179,6 +181,8 @@ + + <p>DrakX ka një bazë të dhënash shumë të plotë të kartave video dhe zakonisht do të identifikojë saktë pajisjen video tuaj. </p> @@ -270,6 +274,10 @@ + + + + <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa1"></a>DrakX ka një bazë të dhënash shumë të plotë të vëzhguesve dhe zakonisht do të identifikojë saktë tuajat. </p> @@ -329,8 +337,8 @@ <dt><span class="term"><a name="configureX_monitor-pa7"></a>Shitës</span></dt> <dd> - <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa8"></a>Nëse instaluesi nuk e ka zbuluar saktësisht monitoruar tuaj dhe ju e dini - cilin ju keni, ju mund të zgjidhni atë nga pema duke përzgjedhur: + <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa8"></a>Nëse instaluesi nuk e ka zbuluar saktësisht monitorin tuaj dhe ju e dini se + cilin ju keni, ju mund ta zgjidhni atë nga alternativat duke zgjedhur: </p> </dd> diff --git a/sq/index.html b/sq/index.html index 508aa14..1fc2ec5 100644 --- a/sq/index.html +++ b/sq/index.html @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ </dl> </dd> <dt><span class="section"><a href="selectLanguage.html">Ju lutemi zgjidhni një gjuhë për të përdorur</a></span></dt> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="acceptLicense.html">Liçenca dhe Shënime Lëshimit</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="acceptLicense.html">Liçenca dhe Shënime Lëshimi</a></span></dt> <dd> <dl> <dt><span class="section"><a href="acceptLicense.html#license">Licenca e Pajtueshmërisë</a></span></dt> @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ <dt><span class="section"><a href="software.html">Program</a></span></dt> <dd> <dl> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="software.html#d5e703">Përzgjedhja Mediave</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="software.html#d5e706">Përzgjedhja Mediave</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="software.html#chooseDesktop">Përzgjedhje Desktop</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="software.html#choosePackageGroups">Zgjidhni Grupet Paketave</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="software.html#minimal-install">Instalim Minimal</a></span></dt> @@ -90,9 +90,9 @@ <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html">Bootloader</a></span></dt> <dd> <dl> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e999">Grub2</a></span></dt> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e1014">Konfiguro Bootloader</a></span></dt> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e1104">Opsione tjera</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e1000">Ndezje në dispozicion</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e1029">Konfiguro Bootloader</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e1161">Opsione tjera</a></span></dt> </dl> </dd> <dt><span class="section"><a href="misc-params.html">Përmbledhje Konfigurimi</a></span></dt> diff --git a/sq/installUpdates.html b/sq/installUpdates.html index d23505b..ff9cdc0 100644 --- a/sq/installUpdates.html +++ b/sq/installUpdates.html @@ -28,6 +28,8 @@ + + diff --git a/sq/installer.html b/sq/installer.html index 9308e8d..dc77914 100644 --- a/sq/installer.html +++ b/sq/installer.html @@ -22,6 +22,8 @@ </div> </div> </div> + + diff --git a/sq/misc-params.html b/sq/misc-params.html index 43a8260..fc3e386 100644 --- a/sq/misc-params.html +++ b/sq/misc-params.html @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa4a"></a>Ky seksion ju lejon të konfiguroni ekranet e kartë(s) grafike tuaj. Për më - shumë informacion, shih <a class="xref" href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_chooser" title="Karta Grafike dhe Konfigurimi Monitorit">seksioni i quajtur “Karta Grafike dhe Konfigurimi Monitorit”</a></p> + shumë informacion, shih <a class="xref" href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_chooser" title="Karta Grafike dhe Konfigurimi Monitorit">Karta Grafike dhe Konfigurimi Monitorit</a></p> @@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ </p> - <p>Për më shumë informacion, shih <a class="xref" href="firewall.html" title="Mur i Zjarrt">Firewall</a>. + <p>Për më shumë informacion, shih <a class="xref" href="firewall.html" title="Mur i Zjarrt">Mur i Zjarrt</a>. </p> diff --git a/sq/selectLanguage.html b/sq/selectLanguage.html index 6b2d2d8..531bf03 100644 --- a/sq/selectLanguage.html +++ b/sq/selectLanguage.html @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Instalim me DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Instalim me DrakX"> <link rel="prev" href="installer.html" title="DrakX, instaluesi Mageia"> - <link rel="next" href="acceptLicense.html" title="Liçenca dhe Shënime Lëshimit"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> + <link rel="next" href="acceptLicense.html" title="Liçenca dhe Shënime Lëshimi"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> <!-- body { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } table { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } diff --git a/sq/setupBootloader.html b/sq/setupBootloader.html index 7802880..154d626 100644 --- a/sq/setupBootloader.html +++ b/sq/setupBootloader.html @@ -28,132 +28,230 @@ - - - - - - - - - <div class="section" title="Grub2"> + + + <div class="section" title="Ndezje në dispozicion"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e999"></a>Grub2 + <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e1000"></a>Ndezje në dispozicion </h3> </div> </div> </div> - - <div class="itemizedlist" title="Grub2 në sisteme Legacy MBR/GPT"> - <p class="title"><b>Grub2 në sisteme Legacy MBR/GPT</b></p> - <ul class="itemizedlist"> - <li class="listitem"> - - <p>GRUB2 (me ose pa menu grafike) do të përdoren ekskluzivisht si bootloader - për një Sistem Legacy/MBR ose Legacy/GPT. - </p> - - </li> - <li class="listitem"> - - <p>Si parazgjedhje, një bootloader i ri do të shkruhet në MBR (Master Boot - Record) të diskuit të parë ose në ndarjen e BIOS boot. - </p> - - </li> - </ul> + <div class="section" title="Grub2"> + <div class="titlepage"> + <div> + <div> + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1002"></a>Grub2 + </h4> + </div> + </div> + </div> + + + <div class="itemizedlist"> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Grub2 në Legacy MBR/GPT sistem</strong></span></p> + <ul class="itemizedlist"> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p>GRUB2 (me ose pa menu grafike) do të përdoren ekskluzivisht si bootloader + për një Sistem Legacy/MBR ose Legacy/GPT. + </p> + + </li> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p>Si parazgjedhje, një bootloader i ri do të shkruhet në MBR (Master Boot + Record) të diskuit të parë ose në ndarjen e BIOS boot. + </p> + + </li> + </ul> + </div> + + <div class="itemizedlist"> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Grub2-efi në UEFI sistem</strong></span></p> + <ul class="itemizedlist"> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p>GRUB2-efi ose rEFInd mund të përdoret si bootloader për një sistem UEFI.</p> + + </li> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p>Si parazgjedhje, një bootloader i ri (Grub2-efi) do të shkruhet në ESP + (Ndarjen e Sistemit EFI). + </p> + + <p>Nëse tashmë ekzistojnë sisteme operative të bazuara në UEFI të instaluara në + kompjuterin tuaj (Windows 8 për shembull), instaluesi Mageia do të zbulojë + ESP ekzistuese të krijuar nga Windows dhe do të shtojë grub2-efi në të. Nëse + nuk ekziston asnjë ESP, atëherë një do të krijohet. Megjithëse është e + mundur të keni disa ESP, kërkohet vetëm një, pavarësisht nga numri i + sistemeve operative që keni. + </p> + + </li> + </ul> + </div> + </div> - - <div class="itemizedlist" title="Grub2-efi në sisteme UEFI"> - <p class="title"><b>Grub2-efi në sisteme UEFI</b></p> - <ul class="itemizedlist"> - <li class="listitem"> - - <p>GRUB2-efi do të përdoren ekskluzivisht si bootloader për një sistem UEFI.</p> - - </li> - <li class="listitem"> - - <p>Si parazgjedhje, një bootloader i ri (Grub2-efi) do të shkruhet në ESP - (Ndarjen e Sistemit EFI). - </p> + <div class="section" title="rEFInd"> + <div class="titlepage"> + <div> + <div> + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1019"></a>rEFInd + </h4> + </div> + </div> + </div> - - <p>Nëse ka sisteme operative të bazuara në UEFI në kompjuterin tuaj (Windows 8 - për shembull), instaluesi i Mageia do të zbulojë ESP-në ekzistuese të - krijuar nga Windows dhe shtoj grub2-efi në të. Nëse nuk ekziston ESP, - atëherë do të krijohet një. Megjithëse është e mundur që të ketë disa ESP, - kërkohet vetëm një, pavarësisht nga numri i sistemeve operative që keni. - </p> - - </li> - </ul> + + <div class="itemizedlist"> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>rEFInd në sisteme UEFI</strong></span></p> + <ul class="itemizedlist"> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p>rEFInd ka një sërë alternativash të këndshme grafike dhe mund të zbulojë + automatikisht ngarkuesit e instaluar EFI. Shih: + http://www.rodsbooks.com/refind/ + </p> + + </li> + </ul> + </div> + + <div class="note" title="Shënim" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> + <table border="0" summary="Note"> + <tr> + <td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Shënim]" src="note.png"></td> + <th align="left"></th> + </tr> + <tr> + <td align="left" valign="top"> + + <p>Ju lutem vini re se në mënyrë që të jeni në gjendje të përdorni + <code class="literal">rEFInd</code> alternativa, një Ndarje Sistemi EFI e instaluar + duhet të përputhet me arkitekturën e sistemit tuaj: nëse keni një Ndarje të + Sistemit EFI 32bit të instaluar në një makinë 64bit për shembull, atëherë + alternativa rEFInd nuk do të shfaqet/disponohet për ju. + </p> + + </td> + </tr> + </table> + </div> + </div> </div> - <div class="section" title="Konfiguro Bootloader"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e1014"></a>Konfiguro Bootloader + <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e1029"></a>Konfiguro Bootloader </h3> </div> </div> </div> - <div class="section" title="Opsionet kryesore të programit Bootloader"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1018"></a>Opsionet kryesore të programit Bootloader + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1033"></a>Opsionet kryesore të programit Bootloader </h4> </div> </div> </div> - - <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Bootloader për përdorim</strong></span></p> - - <p>Kjo veçori është në dispozicion vetëm për sistemet MBR/BIOS - Legacy. Përdoruesit e sistemeve UEFI nuk do ta shohin këtë alternativë këtu. - </p> + <div class="itemizedlist"> + <ul class="itemizedlist"> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p><span class="guimenuitem">GRUB2</span> (ose me një menu grafike ose me tekst), + mund të zgjidhen për të dy <code class="literal">Legacy MBR/BIOS</code> dhe sisteme + <code class="literal">UEFI</code>. + </p> + + </li> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p><span class="guimenuitem">rEFInd</span> (me një menu grafike) është një + alternative vetëm për përdorim me sisteme <code class="literal">UEFI</code>. + </p> + + </li> + </ul> + </div> </li> <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Boot pajisje</strong></span></p> - - <p>Mos e ndryshoni këtë nëse nuk e dini vërtet atë që po bëni</p> + <div class="warning" title="Paralajmërim" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> + <table border="0" summary="Warning"> + <tr> + <td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Paralajmërim]" src="warning.png"></td> + <th align="left"></th> + </tr> + <tr> + <td align="left" valign="top"> + + <p>Mos e ndryshoni këtë nëse nuk dini vërtet se çfarë po bëni.</p> + + </td> + </tr> + </table> + </div> + + <div class="note" title="Shënim" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> + <table border="0" summary="Note"> + <tr> + <td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Shënim]" src="note.png"></td> + <th align="left"></th> + </tr> + <tr> + <td align="left" valign="top"> + + <p>Nuk ka mundësi për të shkruar GRUB në sektorin boot të një ndarjeje (e.g: + <code class="filename">sda1</code>), pasi kjo metodë konsiderohet e pabesueshme. + </p> + + </td> + </tr> + </table> + </div> + + <p>Kur përdorni mënyrën UEFI, pastaj <span class="guilabel">Boot device</span> do të + listohet si <span class="guimenuitem">EFI System Partition</span>. + </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Vonesë para nisjes së imazhit të parazgjedhur</strong></span></p> - <p>Kjo kuti teksti ju lejon të vendosni një vonesë, në sekonda, para fillimit të sistemit operativ të parazgjedhur. @@ -163,7 +261,6 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Siguri</strong></span></p> - <p>Kjo ju lejon të vendosni një fjalëkalim për bootloader. Kjo do të thotë se një emër përdoruesi dhe fjalëkalimi do të kërkohen kur të nisni për të @@ -176,7 +273,6 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Fjalëkalimi</strong></span></p> - <p>Zgjidhni një fjalëkalim për bootloader (opsional)</p> @@ -184,7 +280,6 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Fjalëkalim (përsëri)</strong></span></p> - <p>Rivendosni fjalëkalimin dhe DrakX do të kontrollojë se përputhet me atë të vendosur më sipër @@ -193,17 +288,14 @@ </li> </ul> </div> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Përparuar</em></span></p> - <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Mundëso ACPI</em></span></p> - <p>ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) është një standard për menaxhimin e energjisë. Mund të kursejë energji duke ndaluar pajisjet e @@ -217,7 +309,6 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Mundëso SMP</em></span></p> - <p>Kjo alternativë mundëson/çaktivizon multiprocessing simetrik për procesorë multi-core @@ -227,7 +318,6 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Mundëso APIC</em></span></p> - <p>Mundësimi i kësaj siguron qasjen e sistemit operativ në Kontrolluesin e Ndërprerjes Programore të Avancuar. Pajisjet KNPA lejojnë modele prioritare @@ -238,7 +328,6 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Mundëso Lokale APIC</em></span></p> - <p>Këtu mund të vendosni APIC lokal, i cili menaxhon të gjitha ndërprerjet e jashtme për një procesor të caktuar në një sistem SMP @@ -249,28 +338,66 @@ </div> </div> - <div class="section" title="Konfigurimi i Ngarkuesit Ndezës"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1068"></a>Konfigurimi i Ngarkuesit Ndezës + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1099"></a>Konfigurimi i Ngarkuesit Ndezës </h4> </div> </div> </div> - - + <p>Nëse, në seksionin e mëparshëm keni zgjedhur <code class="literal">rEFInd</code> si + ndezje për të përdorur, atëherë do t'ju paraqiten alternativat e treguara në + pamje direkt më poshtë. Përndryshe, ju lutemi kaloni në pamjen mëpasme të + ekranit për alternativat tuaja. + </p> + + + <p>Alternativat e konfigurimit tuaj rEFInd:</p> + + <div class="itemizedlist"> + <ul class="itemizedlist"> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Instalo ose azhurno rEFInd në ndarjen e + EFI.</strong></span></p> + + </li> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Instalo në /EFI/BOOT.</strong></span></p> + + <p>Kjo alternativë instalon ndezjen në dosjen /EFI/BOOT të ESP (Ndarja e + Sistemit EFI). Kjo mund të jetë e dobishme kur: + </p> + + <p>(a) Instalimi në një disk të lëvizshëm (p.sh. një USB) që mund të hiqet dhe + të futet në një kompjuter tjetër. Nëse ndezja është ruajtur në /EFI/BOOT, + UEFI BIOS do ta zbulojë atë dhe do t'ju lejojë të nisni nga ai kompjuter. + </p> + + <p>(b) Si një zgjidhje ku, për shkak të një UEFI BIOS të gabuar, ndezja e sapo + shkruar për Mageia nuk do të njihet në fund të instalimit. + </p> + + </li> + </ul> + </div> + + <p>Nëse nuk e keni zgjedhur rEFInd si ndezjen për të përdorur seksionin e + mëparshëm, atëherë alternativa e konfigurimit të ndezësi tregohet më poshtë: + </p> + <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Paraygjedhur</strong></span></p> - <p>Sistemi operativ që do të fillojë nga parazgjedhja.</p> @@ -278,7 +405,6 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Shtoj</strong></span></p> - <p>Kjo alternativë ju lejon të kaloni informacionin në kernel ose tregoni kernelin t'ju japë më shumë informacione gjatë ndezje. @@ -288,29 +414,46 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Provo OS të huaj</strong></span></p> - - <p>Nëse tashmë keni instaluar sisteme të tjera operative, Mageia përpiqet t'i - shtojë ato te menyja e re boot Mageia. Nëse nuk e doni këtë sjellje, hiqni - menjëherë alternativën e Provo Sistemin e Huaj. + <p>Nëse tashmë keni të instaluar sisteme të tjera operative, Mageia përpiqet + t'i shtojë ato në menunë tuaj të re të nisjes së Mageia. Nëse nuk e + dëshironi këtë sjellje, atëherë zgjidhni alternativën <span class="guimenuitem">Probe + Foreign OS</span>. + </p> + + </li> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Instalim në /EFI/BOOT. </strong></span>(Shënim: kjo + alternativë e menusë bëhet e disponueshme vetëm kur instaluesi zbulon se një + kompjuter është në modalitetin UEFI). + </p> + + <p>Kjo alternativë instalon ndezjen në dosjen /EFI/BOOT të ESP (Ndarja e + Sistemit EFI). Kjo mund të jetë e dobishme kur: + </p> + + <p>(a) Instalimi në një disk të lëvizshëm (p.sh. një USB) që mund të hiqet dhe + të futet në një kompjuter tjetër. Nëse ndezja është ruajtur në /EFI/BOOT, + UEFI BIOS do ta zbulojë atë dhe do t'ju lejojë të nisni nga ai kompjuter. + </p> + + <p>(b) Si një zgjidhje ku, për shkak të një UEFI BIOS të gabuar, ndezja e sapo + shkruar për Mageia nuk do të njihet në fund të instalimit. </p> </li> </ul> </div> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Përparuar</em></span></p> - - <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Mënyrë Video</em></span></p> - <p>Kjo përcakton madhësinë e ekranit dhe thellësinë e ngjyrës që do të përdoret nga menyja e nisjes. Nëse klikoni poshtë trekëndëshit do ju ofrohen mundësi @@ -321,71 +464,85 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Mos prek ESP ose MBR</em></span></p> - - <p>Zgjidh këtë alternativë nëse nuk doni një Mageia bootable, por do ta - ngarkoni me zinxhirë nga një OS tjetër. Ju do të merrni një paralajmërim se - bootloader mungon. Kliko<span class="emphasis"><em> Dakord</em></span> nëse jeni të sigurt që - kuptoni implikimet dhe dëshironi të vazhdoni. + <p>Zgjidhni këtë alternativë nëse nuk doni një Mageia të ngarkuar, por më parë + dëshironi ta ngarkoni me lidhje nga një OS tjetër. Do të merrni një + paralajmërim se ndezësi mungon. Klikoni <span class="guimenuitem">Dakord + </span>vetëm nëse jeni i sigurt se i kuptoni implikimet dhe dëshironi + të vazhdoni më tej. </p> + + <div class="warning" title="Paralajmërim" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> + <table border="0" summary="Warning"> + <tr> + <td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Paralajmërim]" src="warning.png"></td> + <th align="left"></th> + </tr> + <tr> + <td align="left" valign="top"> + + <p>Ngarkimi i lidhjes përmes ndezjes të trashëguara (GRUB Legacy dhe LiLo) nuk + mbështetet më nga Mageia pasi ka të ngjarë të dështojë kur përpiqeni të + nisni këtë instalim që rezulton i Mageia. Nëse përdorni ndonjë gjë tjetër + përveç GRUB2 ose rEFInd për këtë qëllim, atëherë ju e bëni këtë me rrezikun + tuaj! + </p> + + </td> + </tr> + </table> + </div> </li> </ul> </div> - </div> </div> - <div class="section" title="Opsione tjera"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e1104"></a>Opsione tjera + <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e1161"></a>Opsione tjera </h3> </div> </div> </div> - <div class="section" title="Përdorim i një bootloader ekzistues"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1106"></a>Përdorim i një bootloader ekzistues + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1163"></a>Përdorim i një bootloader ekzistues </h4> </div> </div> </div> - - <p>Procedura e saktë për shtimin e Mageia në një bootloader ekzistues është - përtej fushëveprimit të këtij dokumentacioni. Megjithatë, në shumicën e - rasteve kjo do të përfshijë drejtimin e programit të instalimit të - ngarkuesit bootloader, i cili duhet të zbulojë Mageia dhe automatikisht të - shtojë një hyrje për atë në menynë bootloader. Shih dokumentacionin për - sistemin përkatës operativ. + <p>Procedura e saktë për shtimin e Mageia në një ndezës ekzistues është përtej + fushës së këtij dokumentacioni. Sidoqoftë, në shumicën e rasteve do të + përfshijë ekzekutimin e programit përkatës të instalimit të ndezësit, i cili + duhet të zbulojë Mageia dhe automatikisht të shtojë një hyrje për të në + menunë e ndezësit. Shihni dokumentacionin për sistemin operativ përkatës. </p> </div> - <div class="section" title="Instalimi pa një Bootloader"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1109"></a>Instalimi pa një Bootloader + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1166"></a>Instalimi pa një Bootloader </h4> </div> </div> </div> - <p>Ndërsa ju mund të zgjedhni të instaloni Mageia pa bootloader (shih seksionin 2.1 Përparuar), kjo nuk rekomandohet nëse nuk e dini plotësisht se çfarë po @@ -394,7 +551,6 @@ </p> </div> - <div lang="sq" class="section" title="Shto ose modifiko një hyrje në Menynë e Nisjes"> <div class="titlepage"> diff --git a/sq/setupSCSI.html b/sq/setupSCSI.html index 5f485d1..2ed3812 100644 --- a/sq/setupSCSI.html +++ b/sq/setupSCSI.html @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ <meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"> <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Instalim me DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Instalim me DrakX"> - <link rel="prev" href="acceptLicense.html" title="Liçenca dhe Shënime Lëshimit"> + <link rel="prev" href="acceptLicense.html" title="Liçenca dhe Shënime Lëshimi"> <link rel="next" href="selectInstallClass.html" title="Instalo ose Azhurno"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> <!-- body { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } diff --git a/sq/software.html b/sq/software.html index 0cf3640..2165e12 100644 --- a/sq/software.html +++ b/sq/software.html @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e703"></a>Përzgjedhja Mediave + <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e706"></a>Përzgjedhja Mediave </h3> </div> </div> @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ </div> - <p>Shih <a class="xref" href="software.html#minimal-install" title="Instalim Minimal">Minimal Install</a> për udhëzime se si të bëni një + <p>Shih <a class="xref" href="software.html#minimal-install" title="Instalim Minimal">Instalim Minimal</a> për udhëzime se si të bëni një instalim minimal (pa ose me X & IceWM). </p> diff --git a/sv/Select-and-use-ISOs.html b/sv/Select-and-use-ISOs.html index 2698e17..be92c82 100644 --- a/sv/Select-and-use-ISOs.html +++ b/sv/Select-and-use-ISOs.html @@ -42,11 +42,11 @@ </div> - <p>Mageia is distributed via ISO images. This page will help you to choose - which image best suits your needs. + <p>Mageia distribueras via ISO-avbilder. Den här sidan kommer att hjälpa dig + att välja vilken avbild som bäst passar dina behov. </p> - <p>There are three types of installation media:</p> + <p>Det finns tre sorters installationsmedier:</p> <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>All available languages are present</p> + <p>Alla tillgängliga språk är närvarande</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>All available languages are present</p> + <p>Alla tillgängliga språk är närvarande</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>All available languages are present</p> + <p>Alla tillgängliga språk är närvarande</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -381,11 +381,11 @@ </div> - <div class="section" title="Net install media"> + <div class="section" title="Installationsmedia via nätverk"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e110"></a>Net install media + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e110"></a>Installationsmedia via nätverk </h4> </div> </div> @@ -541,22 +541,22 @@ attempt a repair using BitTorrent. </p> - <p>To generate the checksum for your downloaded ISO, open a console, (no need - to be root), and: + <p>Öppna en konsol för att generera kontrollsumman för din nerladdade ISO + (inget behov av att vara root), och: </p> <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>To use the md5sum, type: <span class="command"><strong>md5sum - path/to/the/image/file.iso</strong></span></p> + <p>För att använda md5-summan, skriv: <span class="command"><strong>md5sum + genvägen/till/din/avbild.iso</strong></span></p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>To use the sha1sum, type: <span class="command"><strong>sha1sum - path/to/the/image/file.iso</strong></span></p> + <p>För att använda sha1-summan, skriv: <span class="command"><strong>sha1sum + genväg/till/avbild.iso</strong></span></p> </li> <li class="listitem"> @@ -845,7 +845,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>This is the end of the process, and you may now unplug your USB stick.</p> + <p>Det här är slutet av processen, och du kan nu dra ut din USB-sticka.</p> </li> </ol> diff --git a/sv/acceptLicense.html b/sv/acceptLicense.html index b7599be..9a73271 100644 --- a/sv/acceptLicense.html +++ b/sv/acceptLicense.html @@ -67,31 +67,30 @@ <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> - <p>Before installing Mageia, please read the license terms and conditions - carefully. - </p> + <p>Läs igenom licensvillkoren ordentligt innan du installerar Mageia.</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>These terms and conditions apply to the entire Mageia distribution and must - be accepted before you can continue. + <p>Villkoren gäller hela Mageias distribution, och måste accepteras innan du + kan fortsätta. </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>To proceed, simply select <span class="emphasis"><em>Accept</em></span> and then click on - <span class="emphasis"><em>Next</em></span></p> + <p>Vänligen välj <span class="emphasis"><em>Acceptera</em></span> och klicka sedan på + <span class="emphasis"><em>Nästa</em></span> för att fortsätta + </p> </li> </ul> </div> - <p>If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for your - interest in Mageia. Clicking <span class="emphasis"><em>Quit</em></span> will reboot your - computer. + <p>Om du beslutar dig för att inte acceptera de här villkoren så tackar vi dig + för ditt intresse för Mageia. Att klicka på <span class="emphasis"><em>Avsluta</em></span> + kommer att starta om din dator. </p> diff --git a/sv/addUser.html b/sv/addUser.html index 4784d9f..31720a1 100644 --- a/sv/addUser.html +++ b/sv/addUser.html @@ -22,13 +22,24 @@ </div> </div> </div> + + + + + + + + + + + <div class="section" title="Ställ in ett administratörs (root) -lösenord:"> <div class="titlepage"> @@ -40,15 +51,15 @@ </div> </div> + <p>It is advisable for all Mageia installations to set a <code class="literal">superuser</code> (Administrator) password, usually called the - <span class="emphasis"><em>root </em></span>password in Linux. As you type a password into the - top box a shield will change from red-to-yellow-to-green depending on the - strength of the password. A green shield shows you are using a strong - password. You need to repeat the same password in the box underneath, to - check that the first entry was not mistyped. + <span class="emphasis"><em>root </em></span>password in Linux. You need to repeat the same + password in the box underneath, to check that the first entry was not + mistyped. </p> + <div class="note" title="Notera" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> <table border="0" summary="Note"> @@ -59,6 +70,12 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> + <p>As you type a password into the top box a shield will change from + red-to-yellow-to-green depending on the strength of the password. A green + shield shows you are using a strong password. + </p> + + <p>All passwords are case-sensitive. It is best to use a mixture of letters (upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password. </p> @@ -69,6 +86,7 @@ </div> </div> + <div class="section" title="Lägg till en användare"> <div class="titlepage"> @@ -80,18 +98,21 @@ </div> </div> + <p>Add a User here. A regular user has fewer privileges than the <code class="literal">superuser</code> (root), but enough to use the Internet, office applications or play games and anything else the average user might use a computer for. </p> + <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Ikon</strong></span></p> + <p>Klicka på den här knappen om du vill ändra på användarens ikon</p> @@ -99,6 +120,7 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Fullständigt namn</strong></span></p> + <p>Klistra in användarens riktiga namn i den här textrutan</p> @@ -106,19 +128,21 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Inloggningsnamn</strong></span></p> + <p>Enter the user login name or let DrakX use a version of the user's real name. <span class="bold"><strong>The login name is case-sensitive.</strong></span></p> + </li> <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Lösenord</strong></span></p> + - <p>Type in the user password. There is a shield at the end of the text box that - indicates the strength of the password. (See also <a class="xref" href="addUser.html#givePassword" title="Notera">Notera</a>) - </p> + <p>Type in the user password (remembering the advice in the Note above).</p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Password (again):</strong></span> Retype the user password. DrakX will check that you have not mistyped the password. @@ -127,6 +151,7 @@ </li> </ul> </div> + <div class="note" title="Notera" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> <table border="0" summary="Note"> @@ -140,11 +165,13 @@ <p>Any users added while installing Mageia, will have a home directory that is both read and write protected (umask=0027) </p> + <p>You can add any extra needed users in the <span class="emphasis"><em>Configuration - Summary</em></span> step during the install. Choose <span class="emphasis"><em>User management</em></span>. </p> + <p>Rättigheterna för åtkomst kan också ändras efter installationen.</p> @@ -154,6 +181,7 @@ </div> </div> + <div class="section" title="Användarhantering (avancerad)"> <div class="titlepage"> @@ -165,10 +193,12 @@ </div> </div> + <p>The <span class="emphasis"><em>Advanced</em></span> option allows you to edit further settings for the user you are adding. </p> + <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> diff --git a/sv/configureServices.html b/sv/configureServices.html index e9b476b..6521b5b 100644 --- a/sv/configureServices.html +++ b/sv/configureServices.html @@ -35,7 +35,8 @@ - <p><a name="configureServices-pa1"></a>Here you can choose which services should start when you boot your system. + <p><a name="configureServices-pa1"></a>Här kan du välja vilka tjänster som ska startas när du startar upp ditt + system. </p> diff --git a/sv/diskPartitioning.html b/sv/diskPartitioning.html index 64b9a4f..5199ef6 100644 --- a/sv/diskPartitioning.html +++ b/sv/diskPartitioning.html @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ <head> <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8"> - <title>Partitioning</title> + <title>Partitionering</title> <meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"> <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Installation med DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Installation med DrakX"> @@ -13,11 +13,11 @@ table { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } --></style></head> <body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"> - <div lang="sv" class="section" title="Partitioning"> + <div lang="sv" class="section" title="Partitionering"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h2 class="title"><a name="diskPartitioning"></a>Partitioning + <h2 class="title"><a name="diskPartitioning"></a>Partitionering </h2> </div> </div> @@ -54,6 +54,10 @@ + + + + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa1"></a>In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) along with the DrakX partitioning proposals for where to install Mageia. </p> @@ -97,8 +101,7 @@ <p><a name="suggestedPartitioning-pa9"></a>If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may offer to use it. This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia - installation, but is a risky operation so you should make sure you have - backed up all important files! + installation but see the warning below. </p> @@ -108,15 +111,6 @@ clicking and dragging the gap between both partitions. See the following screenshot: </p> - - </li> - <li class="listitem"> - - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa12"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Radera och använd hela hårddisken</strong></span></p> - - - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa13"></a>This option will allocate the entire drive for Mageia - </p> <div class="warning" title="Varning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> @@ -128,9 +122,9 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa14"></a>This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care! If you - intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already have data - on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use this option. + <p>This involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition, and therefore is + a risky operation, so you should make sure you have backed up all important + files before proceeding. </p> </td> @@ -148,12 +142,39 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa11"></a>Observera att det innebär att storleken på Windows-partitionen - krymps. Partitionen måste vara "ren", dvs. att Windows måste ha stängts av - korrekt när det användes sist. Den måste också ha defragmenterats, även om - det inte är någon garanti för att filerna har flyttats bort ifrån ytan som - kommer att användas. Du rekommenderas starkt att säkerhetskopiera dina - personliga filer. + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa11"></a>The partition must be "clean", meaning that Windows must have closed down + correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, + although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been + moved out of the area that is about to be used for Mageia. + </p> + + </td> + </tr> + </table> + </div> + + </li> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa12"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Radera och använd hela hårddisken</strong></span></p> + + + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa13"></a>Det här alternativet kommer att allokera hela disken för Mageia + </p> + + + <div class="warning" title="Varning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> + <table border="0" summary="Warning"> + <tr> + <td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Varning]" src="warning.png"></td> + <th align="left"></th> + </tr> + <tr> + <td align="left" valign="top"> + + <p><a name="doPartitionDisks-pa14"></a>This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care! If you + intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already have data + on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use this option. </p> </td> @@ -176,8 +197,6 @@ </div> - - <p>If you are not using the <span class="emphasis"><em>Custom disk partitioning</em></span> option, then the installer will allocate the available space according to the following rules: @@ -195,8 +214,8 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>If the total available space is greater than 50 GB, then three partitions - are created + <p>Om det totala tillgängliga utrymmet är större än 50 GB så skapas tre + partitioner </p> @@ -211,7 +230,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>1/19 is allocated to <code class="filename">swap</code> with a maximum of 4 GB + <p>1/19 är allokerat till <code class="filename">swap</code>med maximalt 4 GB </p> </li> @@ -280,7 +299,7 @@ </p> - <p>See <a class="xref" href="diskPartitioning.html#diskdrake" title="Anpassad diskpartitionering med DiskDrake">DiskDrake</a> for information on how to proceed. + <p>Se <a class="xref" href="diskPartitioning.html#diskdrake" title="Anpassad diskpartitionering med DiskDrake">DiskDrake</a> för information om hur du fortsätter. </p> </td> @@ -429,8 +448,8 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p>If you make any changes here, ensure you still have a <code class="filename">/</code> - (root) partition. + <p>Om du gör några ändringar här, försäkra dig om att du fortfarande har en + <code class="filename">/</code> (root)-partition. </p> </td> @@ -531,8 +550,10 @@ - - + + + + @@ -552,8 +573,8 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><a name="diskdrake-pa4"></a>There is a tab at the top for every detected hard disk (or other storage - device, like a USB key). In the screenshot above there are two available - devices: <code class="filename">sda </code>and <code class="filename">sdb</code>. + device, like a USB key), for example: <code class="filename">sda</code>, + <code class="filename">sdb</code>, <code class="filename">sdc</code> etc. </p> </li> diff --git a/sv/firewall.html b/sv/firewall.html index 51fef4c..cc4131e 100644 --- a/sv/firewall.html +++ b/sv/firewall.html @@ -29,6 +29,8 @@ + + <p><a name="firewall-pa1"></a>This section allows you to configure some simple firewall rules: they determine which type of message from the Internet will be accepted by the target system. This, in turn, allows the corresponding services on the @@ -36,6 +38,8 @@ </p> + + <p>In the default setting (no button is checked), no service of the system is accessible from the network. The <span class="emphasis"><em>Everything (no firewall)</em></span> option enables access to all services of the machine - @@ -62,19 +66,19 @@ </p> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em><portnummer>/<protokoll></em></span></p> + <p><span class="emphasis"><em><port-number>/<protocol></em></span></p> <table border="0" summary="Simple list" class="simplelist"> <tr> - <td>- <span class="emphasis"><em><port-number></em></span> is the value of the port assigned to - the service you want to enable (e.g. 873 for the RSYNC service) as defined - in <span class="emphasis"><em>RFC-433</em></span>; + <td>- <span class="emphasis"><em><port-number></em></span> is the value of the port assigned + to the service you want to enable (e.g. 873 for the RSYNC service) as + defined in <span class="emphasis"><em>RFC-433</em></span>; </td> </tr> <tr> - <td>- <span class="emphasis"><em><protocol></em></span> is one of <span class="emphasis"><em>TCP</em></span> or - <span class="emphasis"><em>UDP</em></span> - the internet protocol that is used by the + <td>- <span class="emphasis"><em><protocol></em></span> is one of <span class="emphasis"><em>TCP</em></span> + or <span class="emphasis"><em>UDP</em></span> - the internet protocol that is used by the service. </td> </tr> diff --git a/sv/graphicalConfiguration.html b/sv/graphicalConfiguration.html index b155b7b..6122d04 100644 --- a/sv/graphicalConfiguration.html +++ b/sv/graphicalConfiguration.html @@ -27,11 +27,11 @@ - <div lang="sv" class="section" title="Konfigurera grafikkort och bildskärm"> + <div lang="sv" class="section" title="Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="configureX_chooser"></a>Konfigurera grafikkort och bildskärm + <h3 class="title"><a name="configureX_chooser"></a>Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration </h3> </div> </div> @@ -51,6 +51,8 @@ + + <p><a name="configureX_chooser-pa1"></a>No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) you chose for this install of Mageia, they are all based on a graphical user interface system called <code class="literal">X Window System</code>, or simply @@ -73,7 +75,7 @@ <p>If you need to, you can select a specific card from this expandable - list. See <a class="xref" href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_card_list" title="Välj en X-server (konfigurera ditt grafikkort)">”Välj en X-server (konfigurera ditt grafikkort)”</a>. + list. See <a class="xref" href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_card_list" title="Välj en X-server (konfigurera ditt grafikkort)">Välj en X-server (konfigurera ditt grafikkort)</a>. </p> </li> @@ -85,7 +87,7 @@ <p>You can choose Plug 'n Play, if applicable, or choose your monitor from the <span class="emphasis"><em>Vendor</em></span> or <span class="emphasis"><em>Generic</em></span> lists. Choose <span class="emphasis"><em>Custom</em></span> if you prefer to manually set the horizontal and - vertical refresh rates of your monitor. See <a class="xref" href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_monitor" title="Att välja din bildskärm">”Att välja din bildskärm”</a>. + vertical refresh rates of your monitor. See <a class="xref" href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_monitor" title="Att välja din bildskärm">Att välja din bildskärm</a>. </p> </li> @@ -175,6 +177,8 @@ + + <p>DrakX har en väldigt omfattande databas av grafikkort och identifierar oftast ditt nuvarande grafikkort korrekt. </p> @@ -192,12 +196,12 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>then the make of your card</p> + <p>sedan kortets tillverkare</p> </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>and the model of card</p> + <p>och kortets modell</p> </li> </ul> @@ -266,6 +270,10 @@ + + + + <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa1"></a>DrakX har en väldigt omfattande databas av grafikkort och kommer oftast att identifiera ditt nuvarande grafikkort rätt. </p> @@ -324,8 +332,8 @@ <dt><span class="term"><a name="configureX_monitor-pa7"></a>Tillverkare</span></dt> <dd> - <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa8"></a>Om installationen inte har upptäckt din bildskärm och du vet vilken du har - så kan du välja den från trädet genom att välja: + <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa8"></a>If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which + one you have, you can choose it from the options by selecting: </p> </dd> @@ -354,11 +362,12 @@ <dt><span class="term"><a name="configureX_monitor-pa9"></a>Allmänna</span></dt> <dd> - <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa10"></a>Selecting this group will list nearly 30 display configurations such as - 1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes flat-panel displays as used in laptops. This is - often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the VESA card driver - when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it - may be wise to be conservative in your selections. + <p><a name="configureX_monitor-pa10"></a>Selecting this group will list approximately 30 display configurations such + as 1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes flat-panel displays as used in laptops. + This is often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the VESA + card driver when your video hardware cannot be determined + automatically. Once again, it may be wise to be conservative in your + selections. </p> </dd> diff --git a/sv/index.html b/sv/index.html index 3717d84..32a0451 100644 --- a/sv/index.html +++ b/sv/index.html @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupSCSI.html">Ställ in SCSI</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="selectInstallClass.html">Installation eller uppgradering</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="selectKeyboard.html">Tangentbord</a></span></dt> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="diskPartitioning.html">Partitioning</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="diskPartitioning.html">Partitionering</a></span></dt> <dd> <dl> <dt><span class="section"><a href="diskPartitioning.html#doPartitionDisks">Föreslagen partitionering</a></span></dt> @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ <dt><span class="section"><a href="software.html">Mjukvara</a></span></dt> <dd> <dl> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="software.html#d5e703">Val av media</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="software.html#d5e706">Val av media</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="software.html#chooseDesktop">Val av skrivbordsmiljö</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="software.html#choosePackageGroups">Val av paketgrupp</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="software.html#minimal-install">Minimal installation</a></span></dt> @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ <dt><span class="section"><a href="graphicalConfiguration.html">Grafisk konfiguration</a></span></dt> <dd> <dl> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_chooser">Konfigurera grafikkort och bildskärm</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_chooser">Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_card_list">Välj en X-server (konfigurera ditt grafikkort)</a></span></dt> <dt><span class="section"><a href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_monitor">Att välja din bildskärm</a></span></dt> </dl> @@ -90,9 +90,9 @@ <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html">Starthanterare</a></span></dt> <dd> <dl> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e999">Grub2</a></span></dt> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e1014">Bootloader Setup</a></span></dt> - <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e1104">Fler alternativ</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e1000">Available Bootloaders</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e1029">Bootloader Setup</a></span></dt> + <dt><span class="section"><a href="setupBootloader.html#d5e1161">Fler alternativ</a></span></dt> </dl> </dd> <dt><span class="section"><a href="misc-params.html">Configuration Summary</a></span></dt> diff --git a/sv/installUpdates.html b/sv/installUpdates.html index 2e93d55..62d97a1 100644 --- a/sv/installUpdates.html +++ b/sv/installUpdates.html @@ -26,6 +26,8 @@ + + diff --git a/sv/installer.html b/sv/installer.html index a88fb19..8e4a529 100644 --- a/sv/installer.html +++ b/sv/installer.html @@ -45,6 +45,8 @@ + + <p>Oavsett om du är ny på GNU-Linux eller en erfaren användare så är Mageias installerare utformad för att göra din installation eller uppgradering så enkel som möjligt. @@ -144,11 +146,11 @@ </p> - <div class="section" title="Legacy (BIOS) Systems"> + <div class="section" title="Äldre (BIOS)-system"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e287"></a>Legacy (BIOS) Systems + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e287"></a>Äldre (BIOS)-system </h4> </div> </div> @@ -173,7 +175,7 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p><span class="bold"><strong>Rescue System</strong></span></p> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Räddningssytem</strong></span></p> <p>This option allows you to either re-install the bootloader for an existing diff --git a/sv/locale.html b/sv/locale.html index 3a89f05..f0a5e9d 100644 --- a/sv/locale.html +++ b/sv/locale.html @@ -60,8 +60,8 @@ </div> - <p><a name="configureTimezoneUTC-pa2"></a>In the next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time - or to GMT, also known as UTC. + <p><a name="configureTimezoneUTC-pa2"></a>På nästa skärm så kan du välja att ställa in din hårdvaruklocka till lokal + tid eller till GMT, också känd som UTC. </p> diff --git a/sv/misc-params.html b/sv/misc-params.html index 26927b5..5bed425 100644 --- a/sv/misc-params.html +++ b/sv/misc-params.html @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-system-pa4b"></a>Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure GRUB2. For more - information, see <a class="xref" href="setupBootloader.html" title="Starthanterare">Bootloader</a></p> + information, see <a class="xref" href="setupBootloader.html" title="Starthanterare">Starthanterare</a></p> @@ -182,8 +182,8 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa1"></a><span class="bold"><strong>Tangentbord</strong></span></p> - <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa1a"></a>Configure your keyboard layout according to your location, language and type - of keyboard. + <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa1a"></a>Ställ in ditt tangentbords layout baserat på din plats, ditt språk och typ + av tangentbord. </p> @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ <p><a name="misc-params-hardware-pa4a"></a>This section allows you to configure your graphics card(s) and displays. For - more information, see <a class="xref" href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_chooser" title="Konfigurera grafikkort och bildskärm">”Konfigurera grafikkort och bildskärm”</a></p> + more information, see <a class="xref" href="graphicalConfiguration.html#configureX_chooser" title="Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration">Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration</a></p> @@ -287,8 +287,8 @@ <tr> <td align="left" valign="top"> - <p><a name="misc-params-network-pa3"></a>When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to monitor - that interface as well. + <p><a name="misc-params-network-pa3"></a>När du lägger till ett nätverkskort, glöm inte att ställa in din brandvägg + att även övervaka det gränssnittet också. </p> </td> @@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ </p> - <p>For more information, see <a class="xref" href="firewall.html" title="Brandvägg">Firewall</a>. + <p>Se <a class="xref" href="firewall.html" title="Brandvägg">Brandvägg</a> för mer information. </p> diff --git a/sv/selectInstallClass.html b/sv/selectInstallClass.html index 777f825..0873c44 100644 --- a/sv/selectInstallClass.html +++ b/sv/selectInstallClass.html @@ -65,7 +65,9 @@ <p><span class="bold"><strong>Uppgradering</strong></span></p> - <p>Use this option to upgrade an existing installation of Mageia.</p> + <p>Använd det här alternativet för att uppgradera en befintlig installation av + Mageia. + </p> </li> </ul> diff --git a/sv/selectKeyboard.html b/sv/selectKeyboard.html index 788b0fb..318d405 100644 --- a/sv/selectKeyboard.html +++ b/sv/selectKeyboard.html @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Installation med DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Installation med DrakX"> <link rel="prev" href="selectInstallClass.html" title="Installation eller uppgradering"> - <link rel="next" href="diskPartitioning.html" title="Partitioning"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> + <link rel="next" href="diskPartitioning.html" title="Partitionering"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> <!-- body { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } table { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } diff --git a/sv/setupBootloader.html b/sv/setupBootloader.html index e1a426f..15b9c11 100644 --- a/sv/setupBootloader.html +++ b/sv/setupBootloader.html @@ -25,134 +25,230 @@ - - - + - - - - - - - <div class="section" title="Grub2"> + + + <div class="section" title="Available Bootloaders"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e999"></a>Grub2 + <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e1000"></a>Available Bootloaders </h3> </div> </div> </div> - - <div class="itemizedlist" title="Grub2 on Legacy MBR/GPT systems"> - <p class="title"><b>Grub2 on Legacy MBR/GPT systems</b></p> - <ul class="itemizedlist"> - <li class="listitem"> - - <p>GRUB2 (with or without graphical menu) will be used exclusively as the - bootloader for a Legacy/MBR or Legacy/GPT system. - </p> - - </li> - <li class="listitem"> - - <p>By default, a new bootloader will be written into either the MBR (Master - Boot Record) of your first hard drive or in the BIOS boot partition. - </p> - - </li> - </ul> + <div class="section" title="Grub2"> + <div class="titlepage"> + <div> + <div> + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1002"></a>Grub2 + </h4> + </div> + </div> + </div> + + + <div class="itemizedlist"> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Grub2 on Legacy MBR/GPT systems</strong></span></p> + <ul class="itemizedlist"> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p>GRUB2 (with or without graphical menu) will be used exclusively as the + bootloader for a Legacy/MBR or Legacy/GPT system. + </p> + + </li> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p>By default, a new bootloader will be written into either the MBR (Master + Boot Record) of your first hard drive or in the BIOS boot partition. + </p> + + </li> + </ul> + </div> + + <div class="itemizedlist"> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Grub2-efi on UEFI systems</strong></span></p> + <ul class="itemizedlist"> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p>GRUB2-efi or rEFInd may be used as the bootloader for a UEFI system.</p> + + </li> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p>By default, a new bootloader (Grub2-efi) will be written into the ESP (EFI + System Partition). + </p> + + <p>If there are already UEFI-based operating systems installed on your computer + (Windows 8 for example), the Mageia installer will detect the existing ESP + created by Windows and add grub2-efi to it. If no ESP exists, then one will + be created. Although it is possible to have several ESPs, only one is + required, whatever the number of operating systems you have. + </p> + + </li> + </ul> + </div> + </div> - - <div class="itemizedlist" title="Grub2-efi för ett UEFI-system."> - <p class="title"><b>Grub2-efi för ett UEFI-system.</b></p> - <ul class="itemizedlist"> - <li class="listitem"> - - <p>GRUB2-efi will be used exclusively as the bootloader for a UEFI system.</p> - - </li> - <li class="listitem"> - - <p>By default, a new bootloader (Grub2-efi) will be written into the ESP (EFI - System Partition). - </p> + <div class="section" title="rEFInd"> + <div class="titlepage"> + <div> + <div> + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1019"></a>rEFInd + </h4> + </div> + </div> + </div> - - <p>If there are already UEFI-based operating systems installed on your computer - (Windows 8 for example), the Mageia installer will detect the existing ESP - created by Windows and add grub2-efi to it. If no ESP exists, then one will - be created. Although it is possible to have several ESPs, only one is - required, whatever the number of operating systems you have. - </p> - - </li> - </ul> + + <div class="itemizedlist"> + <p><span class="bold"><strong>rEFInd on UEFI systems</strong></span></p> + <ul class="itemizedlist"> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p>rEFInd has a nice graphical set of options, and can auto-detect installed + EFI bootloaders. See: http://www.rodsbooks.com/refind/ + </p> + + </li> + </ul> + </div> + + <div class="note" title="Notera" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> + <table border="0" summary="Note"> + <tr> + <td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Notera]" src="note.png"></td> + <th align="left"></th> + </tr> + <tr> + <td align="left" valign="top"> + + <p>Please note that in order to be able to use the <code class="literal">rEFInd</code> + option, an installed EFI System Partition must match your system + architecture: if you have a 32bit EFI System Partition installed on a 64bit + machine for instance, then the rEFInd option will not be displayed/available + to you. + </p> + + </td> + </tr> + </table> + </div> + </div> </div> - <div class="section" title="Bootloader Setup"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e1014"></a>Bootloader Setup + <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e1029"></a>Bootloader Setup </h3> </div> </div> </div> - <div class="section" title="Huvudalternativ för startshanteraren"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1018"></a>Huvudalternativ för startshanteraren + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1033"></a>Huvudalternativ för startshanteraren </h4> </div> </div> </div> - - <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Uppstartshanterare att använda</strong></span></p> - - <p>This feature is only available to Legacy MBR/BIOS systems. Users of UEFI - systems will not see this option here. - </p> + <div class="itemizedlist"> + <ul class="itemizedlist"> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p><span class="guimenuitem">GRUB2</span> (with either a graphical or a text menu), + can be chosen for both <code class="literal">Legacy MBR/BIOS</code> systems and + <code class="literal">UEFI</code> systems. + </p> + + </li> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p><span class="guimenuitem">rEFInd</span> (with a graphical menu) is an alternative + option solely for use with <code class="literal">UEFI</code> systems. + </p> + + </li> + </ul> + </div> </li> <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Boot device</strong></span></p> - - <p>Ändra inte på det här om du inte vet vad du gör</p> + <div class="warning" title="Varning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> + <table border="0" summary="Warning"> + <tr> + <td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Varning]" src="warning.png"></td> + <th align="left"></th> + </tr> + <tr> + <td align="left" valign="top"> + + <p>Don't change this unless you really know what you are doing.</p> + + </td> + </tr> + </table> + </div> + + <div class="note" title="Notera" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> + <table border="0" summary="Note"> + <tr> + <td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Notera]" src="note.png"></td> + <th align="left"></th> + </tr> + <tr> + <td align="left" valign="top"> + + <p>There is no option to write GRUB to the boot sector of a partition (e.g: + <code class="filename">sda1</code>), as this method is considered unreliable. + </p> + + </td> + </tr> + </table> + </div> + + <p>When using UEFI mode, then the <span class="guilabel">Boot device</span> will be + listed as <span class="guimenuitem">EFI System Partition</span>. + </p> </li> <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Fördröj innan standard-avbilden startas</strong></span></p> - <p>This text box lets you set a delay, in seconds, before the default operating system is started up. @@ -162,7 +258,6 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Säkerhet</strong></span></p> - <p>This allows you to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username and password will be required when booting in order to select a booting @@ -175,7 +270,6 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Lösenord</strong></span></p> - <p>Välj ett lösenord för uppstartshanteraren (valfritt)</p> @@ -183,7 +277,6 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Lösenordet (igen)</strong></span></p> - <p>Retype the password and DrakX will check that it matches with the one set above @@ -192,17 +285,14 @@ </li> </ul> </div> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Avancerad</em></span></p> - <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Aktivera ACPI</em></span></p> - <p>ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices. Deselecting it @@ -215,7 +305,6 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Aktivera SMP</em></span></p> - <p>This option enables/disables symmetric multiprocessing for multi-core processors @@ -225,7 +314,6 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Aktivera APIC</em></span></p> - <p>Enabling this gives the operating system access to the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. APIC devices permit more complex priority models, and @@ -236,7 +324,6 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Aktivera Lokal APIC</em></span></p> - <p>Here you can set Local APIC, which manages all external interrupts for a specific processor in an SMP system @@ -247,28 +334,66 @@ </div> </div> - <div class="section" title="Konfiguration av starthanterare"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1068"></a>Konfiguration av starthanterare + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1099"></a>Konfiguration av starthanterare </h4> </div> </div> </div> - - + <p>If, in the previous section you selected <code class="literal">rEFInd</code> as the + bootloader to use, you would then be presented with the options shown in the + screenshot directly below. Otherwise, please instead move on to the + subsequent screenshot for your options. + </p> + + + <p>Your rEFInd configuration options:</p> + + <div class="itemizedlist"> + <ul class="itemizedlist"> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Install or update rEFInd in the EFI system + partition.</strong></span></p> + + </li> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Install in /EFI/BOOT.</strong></span></p> + + <p>This option installs the bootloader in the /EFI/BOOT directory of the ESP + (EFI System Partition). This can be useful when: + </p> + + <p>(a) Installing onto a removable drive (e.g. a USB stick) that can be removed + and plugged into a different machine. If the bootloader is stored in + /EFI/BOOT, UEFI BIOS's will detect it and allow you to boot from that drive. + </p> + + <p>(b) As a workaround where, due to a buggy UEFI BIOS, the newly written + bootloader for Mageia will not be recognized at end of the installation. + </p> + + </li> + </ul> + </div> + + <p>If you did not select rEFInd as the bootloader to use in the previous + section, then your bootloader configuration options are shown below: + </p> + <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Standard</strong></span></p> - <p>The operating system to be started up by default.</p> @@ -276,7 +401,6 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Fäst</strong></span></p> - <p>This option lets you pass information to the kernel or tell the kernel to give you more information as it boots. @@ -286,29 +410,45 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="bold"><strong>Undersök främmande OS</strong></span></p> - <p>If you already have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them to your new Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, - then untick the Probe Foreign OS option. + then untick the <span class="guimenuitem">Probe Foreign OS</span> option. + </p> + + </li> + <li class="listitem"> + + <p><span class="bold"><strong>Install in /EFI/BOOT. </strong></span>(Note: this menu + option only becomes available where the installer detects that a machine is + in UEFI mode). + </p> + + <p>This option installs the bootloader in the /EFI/BOOT directory of the ESP + (EFI System Partition). This can be useful when: + </p> + + <p>(a) Installing onto a removable drive (e.g. a USB stick) that can be removed + and plugged into a different machine. If the bootloader is stored in + /EFI/BOOT, UEFI BIOS's will detect it and allow you to boot from that drive. + </p> + + <p>(b) As a workaround where, due to a buggy UEFI BIOS, the newly written + bootloader for Mageia will not be recognized at end of the installation. </p> </li> </ul> </div> - <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Avancerad</em></span></p> - - <div class="itemizedlist"> <ul class="itemizedlist"> <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Grafikläge</em></span></p> - <p>This sets the screen size and colour depth to be used by the boot menu. If you click the down-triangle you will be offered other size and colour depth @@ -319,70 +459,83 @@ <li class="listitem"> <p><span class="emphasis"><em>Rör inte ESP eller MBR</em></span></p> - <p>Select this option if you don't want a bootable Mageia, but would rather chain-load it from another OS. You will get a warning that the bootloader is - missing. Click<span class="emphasis"><em> Ok</em></span> if you are sure you understand the - implications, and wish to proceed. + missing. Click <span class="guimenuitem">Ok </span>only if you are sure you + understand the implications, and wish to proceed. </p> + + <div class="warning" title="Varning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"> + <table border="0" summary="Warning"> + <tr> + <td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Varning]" src="warning.png"></td> + <th align="left"></th> + </tr> + <tr> + <td align="left" valign="top"> + + <p>Chain-loading via legacy bootloaders (GRUB Legacy and LiLo) is no longer + supported by Mageia as it is likely to fail when attempting to boot this + resulting installation of Mageia. If you use anything other than GRUB2 or + rEFInd for this purpose, then you do so at your own risk! + </p> + + </td> + </tr> + </table> + </div> </li> </ul> </div> - </div> </div> - <div class="section" title="Fler alternativ"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e1104"></a>Fler alternativ + <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e1161"></a>Fler alternativ </h3> </div> </div> </div> - <div class="section" title="Använder en befintlig startshanterare"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1106"></a>Använder en befintlig startshanterare + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1163"></a>Använder en befintlig startshanterare </h4> </div> </div> </div> - <p>The exact procedure for adding Mageia to an existing bootloader is beyond - the scope of this documentation. However in most cases it will involve + the scope of this documentation. However, in most cases it will involve running the relevant bootloader installation program, which should detect Mageia and automatically add an entry for it in the bootloader menu. See the documentation for the relevant operating system. </p> </div> - <div class="section" title="Installera utan en uppstartshanterare"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1109"></a>Installera utan en uppstartshanterare + <h4 class="title"><a name="d5e1166"></a>Installera utan en uppstartshanterare </h4> </div> </div> </div> - <p>While you can opt to install Mageia without a bootloader (see section 2.1 Advanced), this is not recommended unless you absolutely know what you are @@ -391,7 +544,6 @@ </p> </div> - <div lang="sv" class="section" title="Lägg till eller ändra en post i bootmenyn"> <div class="titlepage"> diff --git a/sv/software.html b/sv/software.html index 285f00c..445a593 100644 --- a/sv/software.html +++ b/sv/software.html @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ <meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"> <link rel="home" href="index.html" title="Installation med DrakX"> <link rel="up" href="index.html" title="Installation med DrakX"> - <link rel="prev" href="diskPartitioning.html" title="Partitioning"> + <link rel="prev" href="diskPartitioning.html" title="Partitionering"> <link rel="next" href="addUser.html" title="Användarhantering"><style xmlns="http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/transitional" type="text/css"> <!-- body { font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 13px } @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e703"></a>Val av media + <h3 class="title"><a name="d5e706"></a>Val av media </h3> </div> </div> @@ -40,11 +40,11 @@ - <div lang="sv" class="section" title="Supplemental Installation Media"> + <div lang="sv" class="section" title="Kompletterande installationsmedia"> <div class="titlepage"> <div> <div> - <h4 class="title"><a name="add_supplemental_media"></a>Supplemental Installation Media + <h4 class="title"><a name="add_supplemental_media"></a>Kompletterande installationsmedia </h4> </div> </div> @@ -175,11 +175,11 @@ </li> <li class="listitem"> - <p>The <span class="emphasis"><em>Tainted</em></span> repository includes packages released under - a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is - that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, - e.g. multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages - needed to play commercial video DVD's, etc. + <p>Filförrådet <span class="emphasis"><em>Tainted</em></span> inkluderar paket som släpps under + en Fri licens. Huvudkriteriet för att placera paket i det här filförrådet är + att de kan göra intrång i patent och upphovsrättslagar i en del länder, t.ex + multimedia-kodekar som behövs för att spela upp olika ljud/video-filer; + paketen behövs för att spela upp kommersiella DVD:er, osv. </p> </li> @@ -304,8 +304,8 @@ </div> - <p>See <a class="xref" href="software.html#minimal-install" title="Minimal installation">Minimal Install</a> for instructions on how to do a - minimal install (without or with X & IceWM). + <p>Läs <a class="xref" href="software.html#minimal-install" title="Minimal installation">Minimal installation</a> för instruktioner om hur man gör en + minimal installation (utan eller med X & IceWM). </p> </div> diff --git a/sv/uninstall-Mageia.html b/sv/uninstall-Mageia.html index 66fd5b3..e1f47f7 100644 --- a/sv/uninstall-Mageia.html +++ b/sv/uninstall-Mageia.html @@ -30,9 +30,10 @@ - <p>If Mageia didn't convince you or you can't install it correctly - in short - you want get rid of it - that is your right and Mageia also gives you the - possibility to uninstall. This is not true for every operating system. + <p>Om Mageia inte övertygade dig eller om du inte kan installera det korrekt - + kort sagt så vill du göra dig av med det - det är din rätt och Mageia ger + dig också möjlighet att avinstallera. Så är det inte för varje + operativsystem. </p> diff --git a/uk/acceptLicense.html b/uk/acceptLicense.html index 4e78b77..f7132ad 100644 --- a/uk/acceptLicense.html +++ b/uk/acceptLicense.html @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ <p>Якщо ви не погоджуєтеся з умовами ліцензування, ми залишимося вдячні за те, що ви звернули увагу на наш дистрибутив. Після натискання кнопки - <span class="emphasis"><em>Вийти</em></span> ваш комп'ютер буде перезавантажено. + <span class="emphasis"><em>Вийти</em></span> ваш комп’ютер буде перезавантажено. </p> diff --git a/uk/soundConfig.html b/uk/soundConfig.html index 538e4e3..2771b36 100644 --- a/uk/soundConfig.html +++ b/uk/soundConfig.html @@ -23,30 +23,29 @@ </div> </div> - - - - - - + <p>На цій сторінці буде показано назву драйвера, який інструмент встановлення + вибрав для вашої звукової картки. Цим драйвером буде типовий драйвер, якщо + такий передбачено для картки. + </p> - <p>За допомогою цієї сторінки засіб встановлення ознайомить вас із параметрами - роботи звукової картки. Вибраний драйвер має працювати без проблем. + <p>Типовий драйвер має працювати без проблем. Втім, якщо після встановлення у + вас виникли проблеми зі звуком, віддайте команду + <span class="command"><strong>draksound</strong></span> або запустіть відповідний модуль за допомогою + Центру керування Mageia: виберіть сторінку <span class="guilabel">Обладнання</span> і + натисніть пункт <span class="guilabel">Налаштування звуку</span> у верхній правій + частині вікна. </p> - - <p>Втім, якщо після встановлення виникнуть якісь проблеми, віддайте команду - <span class="command"><strong>draksound</strong></span> або запустіть відповідний інструмент за - допомогою пункту <span class="guimenu">Центр керування Mageia</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Обладнання</span> → <span class="guimenuitem">Налаштування - звуку</span>. Далі, у вікні - <code class="literal">draksound</code> або <span class="emphasis"><em>Налаштування звуку</em></span> - натисніть кнопку <span class="emphasis"><em>Вирішення проблем</em></span>, щоб ознайомитися із - корисними порадами щодо усування проблем зі звуком. + <p>За допомогою цього інструмента, ви можете вибрати, який з модулів стане + звуковим сервером, отже, буде керувати звуком. Можна вибрати між pulseaudio + і pipewire. Для другого варіанта ви можете вибрати засіб керування сеансом + <code class="literal">Wireplumber</code> або <code class="literal">Pipewire Media + Session</code>. Після застосування налаштувань система встановити + потрібні пакунки і виконає налаштовування служб. </p> - <div class="section" title="Додатково"> <div class="titlepage"> @@ -58,14 +57,12 @@ </div> </div> - - <p>Якщо для вашої звукової картки немає типового драйвера, ймовірно, існують - альтернативні драйвери, одним з яких ви можете скористатися. Якщо це саме - так, але ви вважаєте, що засіб встановлення здійснив неоптимальний вибір, ви - можете натиснути кнопку <span class="emphasis"><em>Додатково</em></span> і вказати драйвер - вручну. + <p>Натискання пункту <span class="bold"><strong><span class="guibutton">Додатково</span></strong></span> на цій сторінці + надасть вам змогу скинути налаштування звукового мікшера до типових значень. </p> + + <p></p> </div> |